]> gcc.gnu.org Git - gcc.git/blob - gcc/cse.c
(simplify_binary_operation, simplify_relational_operation): Check for
[gcc.git] / gcc / cse.c
1 /* Common subexpression elimination for GNU compiler.
2 Copyright (C) 1987, 1988, 1989, 1992. 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3
4 This file is part of GNU CC.
5
6 GNU CC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
7 it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
8 the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
9 any later version.
10
11 GNU CC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
12 but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
13 MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
14 GNU General Public License for more details.
15
16 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
17 along with GNU CC; see the file COPYING. If not, write to
18 the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. */
19
20
21 #include "config.h"
22 #include "rtl.h"
23 #include "regs.h"
24 #include "hard-reg-set.h"
25 #include "flags.h"
26 #include "real.h"
27 #include "insn-config.h"
28 #include "recog.h"
29
30 #include <stdio.h>
31 #include <setjmp.h>
32
33 /* The basic idea of common subexpression elimination is to go
34 through the code, keeping a record of expressions that would
35 have the same value at the current scan point, and replacing
36 expressions encountered with the cheapest equivalent expression.
37
38 It is too complicated to keep track of the different possibilities
39 when control paths merge; so, at each label, we forget all that is
40 known and start fresh. This can be described as processing each
41 basic block separately. Note, however, that these are not quite
42 the same as the basic blocks found by a later pass and used for
43 data flow analysis and register packing. We do not need to start fresh
44 after a conditional jump instruction if there is no label there.
45
46 We use two data structures to record the equivalent expressions:
47 a hash table for most expressions, and several vectors together
48 with "quantity numbers" to record equivalent (pseudo) registers.
49
50 The use of the special data structure for registers is desirable
51 because it is faster. It is possible because registers references
52 contain a fairly small number, the register number, taken from
53 a contiguously allocated series, and two register references are
54 identical if they have the same number. General expressions
55 do not have any such thing, so the only way to retrieve the
56 information recorded on an expression other than a register
57 is to keep it in a hash table.
58
59 Registers and "quantity numbers":
60
61 At the start of each basic block, all of the (hardware and pseudo)
62 registers used in the function are given distinct quantity
63 numbers to indicate their contents. During scan, when the code
64 copies one register into another, we copy the quantity number.
65 When a register is loaded in any other way, we allocate a new
66 quantity number to describe the value generated by this operation.
67 `reg_qty' records what quantity a register is currently thought
68 of as containing.
69
70 All real quantity numbers are greater than or equal to `max_reg'.
71 If register N has not been assigned a quantity, reg_qty[N] will equal N.
72
73 Quantity numbers below `max_reg' do not exist and none of the `qty_...'
74 variables should be referenced with an index below `max_reg'.
75
76 We also maintain a bidirectional chain of registers for each
77 quantity number. `qty_first_reg', `qty_last_reg',
78 `reg_next_eqv' and `reg_prev_eqv' hold these chains.
79
80 The first register in a chain is the one whose lifespan is least local.
81 Among equals, it is the one that was seen first.
82 We replace any equivalent register with that one.
83
84 If two registers have the same quantity number, it must be true that
85 REG expressions with `qty_mode' must be in the hash table for both
86 registers and must be in the same class.
87
88 The converse is not true. Since hard registers may be referenced in
89 any mode, two REG expressions might be equivalent in the hash table
90 but not have the same quantity number if the quantity number of one
91 of the registers is not the same mode as those expressions.
92
93 Constants and quantity numbers
94
95 When a quantity has a known constant value, that value is stored
96 in the appropriate element of qty_const. This is in addition to
97 putting the constant in the hash table as is usual for non-regs.
98
99 Whether a reg or a constant is preferred is determined by the configuration
100 macro CONST_COSTS and will often depend on the constant value. In any
101 event, expressions containing constants can be simplified, by fold_rtx.
102
103 When a quantity has a known nearly constant value (such as an address
104 of a stack slot), that value is stored in the appropriate element
105 of qty_const.
106
107 Integer constants don't have a machine mode. However, cse
108 determines the intended machine mode from the destination
109 of the instruction that moves the constant. The machine mode
110 is recorded in the hash table along with the actual RTL
111 constant expression so that different modes are kept separate.
112
113 Other expressions:
114
115 To record known equivalences among expressions in general
116 we use a hash table called `table'. It has a fixed number of buckets
117 that contain chains of `struct table_elt' elements for expressions.
118 These chains connect the elements whose expressions have the same
119 hash codes.
120
121 Other chains through the same elements connect the elements which
122 currently have equivalent values.
123
124 Register references in an expression are canonicalized before hashing
125 the expression. This is done using `reg_qty' and `qty_first_reg'.
126 The hash code of a register reference is computed using the quantity
127 number, not the register number.
128
129 When the value of an expression changes, it is necessary to remove from the
130 hash table not just that expression but all expressions whose values
131 could be different as a result.
132
133 1. If the value changing is in memory, except in special cases
134 ANYTHING referring to memory could be changed. That is because
135 nobody knows where a pointer does not point.
136 The function `invalidate_memory' removes what is necessary.
137
138 The special cases are when the address is constant or is
139 a constant plus a fixed register such as the frame pointer
140 or a static chain pointer. When such addresses are stored in,
141 we can tell exactly which other such addresses must be invalidated
142 due to overlap. `invalidate' does this.
143 All expressions that refer to non-constant
144 memory addresses are also invalidated. `invalidate_memory' does this.
145
146 2. If the value changing is a register, all expressions
147 containing references to that register, and only those,
148 must be removed.
149
150 Because searching the entire hash table for expressions that contain
151 a register is very slow, we try to figure out when it isn't necessary.
152 Precisely, this is necessary only when expressions have been
153 entered in the hash table using this register, and then the value has
154 changed, and then another expression wants to be added to refer to
155 the register's new value. This sequence of circumstances is rare
156 within any one basic block.
157
158 The vectors `reg_tick' and `reg_in_table' are used to detect this case.
159 reg_tick[i] is incremented whenever a value is stored in register i.
160 reg_in_table[i] holds -1 if no references to register i have been
161 entered in the table; otherwise, it contains the value reg_tick[i] had
162 when the references were entered. If we want to enter a reference
163 and reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i], we must scan and remove old references.
164 Until we want to enter a new entry, the mere fact that the two vectors
165 don't match makes the entries be ignored if anyone tries to match them.
166
167 Registers themselves are entered in the hash table as well as in
168 the equivalent-register chains. However, the vectors `reg_tick'
169 and `reg_in_table' do not apply to expressions which are simple
170 register references. These expressions are removed from the table
171 immediately when they become invalid, and this can be done even if
172 we do not immediately search for all the expressions that refer to
173 the register.
174
175 A CLOBBER rtx in an instruction invalidates its operand for further
176 reuse. A CLOBBER or SET rtx whose operand is a MEM:BLK
177 invalidates everything that resides in memory.
178
179 Related expressions:
180
181 Constant expressions that differ only by an additive integer
182 are called related. When a constant expression is put in
183 the table, the related expression with no constant term
184 is also entered. These are made to point at each other
185 so that it is possible to find out if there exists any
186 register equivalent to an expression related to a given expression. */
187
188 /* One plus largest register number used in this function. */
189
190 static int max_reg;
191
192 /* Length of vectors indexed by quantity number.
193 We know in advance we will not need a quantity number this big. */
194
195 static int max_qty;
196
197 /* Next quantity number to be allocated.
198 This is 1 + the largest number needed so far. */
199
200 static int next_qty;
201
202 /* Indexed by quantity number, gives the first (or last) (pseudo) register
203 in the chain of registers that currently contain this quantity. */
204
205 static int *qty_first_reg;
206 static int *qty_last_reg;
207
208 /* Index by quantity number, gives the mode of the quantity. */
209
210 static enum machine_mode *qty_mode;
211
212 /* Indexed by quantity number, gives the rtx of the constant value of the
213 quantity, or zero if it does not have a known value.
214 A sum of the frame pointer (or arg pointer) plus a constant
215 can also be entered here. */
216
217 static rtx *qty_const;
218
219 /* Indexed by qty number, gives the insn that stored the constant value
220 recorded in `qty_const'. */
221
222 static rtx *qty_const_insn;
223
224 /* The next three variables are used to track when a comparison between a
225 quantity and some constant or register has been passed. In that case, we
226 know the results of the comparison in case we see it again. These variables
227 record a comparison that is known to be true. */
228
229 /* Indexed by qty number, gives the rtx code of a comparison with a known
230 result involving this quantity. If none, it is UNKNOWN. */
231 static enum rtx_code *qty_comparison_code;
232
233 /* Indexed by qty number, gives the constant being compared against in a
234 comparison of known result. If no such comparison, it is undefined.
235 If the comparison is not with a constant, it is zero. */
236
237 static rtx *qty_comparison_const;
238
239 /* Indexed by qty number, gives the quantity being compared against in a
240 comparison of known result. If no such comparison, if it undefined.
241 If the comparison is not with a register, it is -1. */
242
243 static int *qty_comparison_qty;
244
245 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
246 /* For machines that have a CC0, we do not record its value in the hash
247 table since its use is guaranteed to be the insn immediately following
248 its definition and any other insn is presumed to invalidate it.
249
250 Instead, we store below the value last assigned to CC0. If it should
251 happen to be a constant, it is stored in preference to the actual
252 assigned value. In case it is a constant, we store the mode in which
253 the constant should be interpreted. */
254
255 static rtx prev_insn_cc0;
256 static enum machine_mode prev_insn_cc0_mode;
257 #endif
258
259 /* Previous actual insn. 0 if at first insn of basic block. */
260
261 static rtx prev_insn;
262
263 /* Insn being scanned. */
264
265 static rtx this_insn;
266
267 /* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the quantity number
268 of the register's current contents. */
269
270 static int *reg_qty;
271
272 /* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the number of the next (or
273 previous) (pseudo) register in the chain of registers sharing the same
274 value.
275
276 Or -1 if this register is at the end of the chain.
277
278 If reg_qty[N] == N, reg_next_eqv[N] is undefined. */
279
280 static int *reg_next_eqv;
281 static int *reg_prev_eqv;
282
283 /* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the number of times
284 that register has been altered in the current basic block. */
285
286 static int *reg_tick;
287
288 /* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the reg_tick value at which
289 rtx's containing this register are valid in the hash table.
290 If this does not equal the current reg_tick value, such expressions
291 existing in the hash table are invalid.
292 If this is -1, no expressions containing this register have been
293 entered in the table. */
294
295 static int *reg_in_table;
296
297 /* A HARD_REG_SET containing all the hard registers for which there is
298 currently a REG expression in the hash table. Note the difference
299 from the above variables, which indicate if the REG is mentioned in some
300 expression in the table. */
301
302 static HARD_REG_SET hard_regs_in_table;
303
304 /* A HARD_REG_SET containing all the hard registers that are invalidated
305 by a CALL_INSN. */
306
307 static HARD_REG_SET regs_invalidated_by_call;
308
309 /* Two vectors of ints:
310 one containing max_reg -1's; the other max_reg + 500 (an approximation
311 for max_qty) elements where element i contains i.
312 These are used to initialize various other vectors fast. */
313
314 static int *all_minus_one;
315 static int *consec_ints;
316
317 /* CUID of insn that starts the basic block currently being cse-processed. */
318
319 static int cse_basic_block_start;
320
321 /* CUID of insn that ends the basic block currently being cse-processed. */
322
323 static int cse_basic_block_end;
324
325 /* Vector mapping INSN_UIDs to cuids.
326 The cuids are like uids but increase monotonically always.
327 We use them to see whether a reg is used outside a given basic block. */
328
329 static int *uid_cuid;
330
331 /* Highest UID in UID_CUID. */
332 static int max_uid;
333
334 /* Get the cuid of an insn. */
335
336 #define INSN_CUID(INSN) (uid_cuid[INSN_UID (INSN)])
337
338 /* Nonzero if cse has altered conditional jump insns
339 in such a way that jump optimization should be redone. */
340
341 static int cse_jumps_altered;
342
343 /* canon_hash stores 1 in do_not_record
344 if it notices a reference to CC0, PC, or some other volatile
345 subexpression. */
346
347 static int do_not_record;
348
349 /* canon_hash stores 1 in hash_arg_in_memory
350 if it notices a reference to memory within the expression being hashed. */
351
352 static int hash_arg_in_memory;
353
354 /* canon_hash stores 1 in hash_arg_in_struct
355 if it notices a reference to memory that's part of a structure. */
356
357 static int hash_arg_in_struct;
358
359 /* The hash table contains buckets which are chains of `struct table_elt's,
360 each recording one expression's information.
361 That expression is in the `exp' field.
362
363 Those elements with the same hash code are chained in both directions
364 through the `next_same_hash' and `prev_same_hash' fields.
365
366 Each set of expressions with equivalent values
367 are on a two-way chain through the `next_same_value'
368 and `prev_same_value' fields, and all point with
369 the `first_same_value' field at the first element in
370 that chain. The chain is in order of increasing cost.
371 Each element's cost value is in its `cost' field.
372
373 The `in_memory' field is nonzero for elements that
374 involve any reference to memory. These elements are removed
375 whenever a write is done to an unidentified location in memory.
376 To be safe, we assume that a memory address is unidentified unless
377 the address is either a symbol constant or a constant plus
378 the frame pointer or argument pointer.
379
380 The `in_struct' field is nonzero for elements that
381 involve any reference to memory inside a structure or array.
382
383 The `related_value' field is used to connect related expressions
384 (that differ by adding an integer).
385 The related expressions are chained in a circular fashion.
386 `related_value' is zero for expressions for which this
387 chain is not useful.
388
389 The `cost' field stores the cost of this element's expression.
390
391 The `is_const' flag is set if the element is a constant (including
392 a fixed address).
393
394 The `flag' field is used as a temporary during some search routines.
395
396 The `mode' field is usually the same as GET_MODE (`exp'), but
397 if `exp' is a CONST_INT and has no machine mode then the `mode'
398 field is the mode it was being used as. Each constant is
399 recorded separately for each mode it is used with. */
400
401
402 struct table_elt
403 {
404 rtx exp;
405 struct table_elt *next_same_hash;
406 struct table_elt *prev_same_hash;
407 struct table_elt *next_same_value;
408 struct table_elt *prev_same_value;
409 struct table_elt *first_same_value;
410 struct table_elt *related_value;
411 int cost;
412 enum machine_mode mode;
413 char in_memory;
414 char in_struct;
415 char is_const;
416 char flag;
417 };
418
419 #define HASHBITS 16
420
421 /* We don't want a lot of buckets, because we rarely have very many
422 things stored in the hash table, and a lot of buckets slows
423 down a lot of loops that happen frequently. */
424 #define NBUCKETS 31
425
426 /* Compute hash code of X in mode M. Special-case case where X is a pseudo
427 register (hard registers may require `do_not_record' to be set). */
428
429 #define HASH(X, M) \
430 (GET_CODE (X) == REG && REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER \
431 ? ((((int) REG << 7) + reg_qty[REGNO (X)]) % NBUCKETS) \
432 : canon_hash (X, M) % NBUCKETS)
433
434 /* Determine whether register number N is considered a fixed register for CSE.
435 It is desirable to replace other regs with fixed regs, to reduce need for
436 non-fixed hard regs.
437 A reg wins if it is either the frame pointer or designated as fixed,
438 but not if it is an overlapping register. */
439 #ifdef OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P
440 #define FIXED_REGNO_P(N) \
441 (((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || fixed_regs[N]) \
442 && ! OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P ((N)))
443 #else
444 #define FIXED_REGNO_P(N) \
445 ((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || fixed_regs[N])
446 #endif
447
448 /* Compute cost of X, as stored in the `cost' field of a table_elt. Fixed
449 hard registers and pointers into the frame are the cheapest with a cost
450 of 0. Next come pseudos with a cost of one and other hard registers with
451 a cost of 2. Aside from these special cases, call `rtx_cost'. */
452
453 #define CHEAP_REG(N) \
454 ((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || (N) == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM \
455 || (N) == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM \
456 || ((N) >= FIRST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER && (N) <= LAST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER) \
457 || ((N) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER \
458 && FIXED_REGNO_P (N) && REGNO_REG_CLASS (N) != NO_REGS))
459
460 #define COST(X) \
461 (GET_CODE (X) == REG \
462 ? (CHEAP_REG (REGNO (X)) ? 0 \
463 : REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1 \
464 : 2) \
465 : rtx_cost (X, SET) * 2)
466
467 /* Determine if the quantity number for register X represents a valid index
468 into the `qty_...' variables. */
469
470 #define REGNO_QTY_VALID_P(N) (reg_qty[N] != (N))
471
472 static struct table_elt *table[NBUCKETS];
473
474 /* Chain of `struct table_elt's made so far for this function
475 but currently removed from the table. */
476
477 static struct table_elt *free_element_chain;
478
479 /* Number of `struct table_elt' structures made so far for this function. */
480
481 static int n_elements_made;
482
483 /* Maximum value `n_elements_made' has had so far in this compilation
484 for functions previously processed. */
485
486 static int max_elements_made;
487
488 /* Surviving equivalence class when two equivalence classes are merged
489 by recording the effects of a jump in the last insn. Zero if the
490 last insn was not a conditional jump. */
491
492 static struct table_elt *last_jump_equiv_class;
493
494 /* Set to the cost of a constant pool reference if one was found for a
495 symbolic constant. If this was found, it means we should try to
496 convert constants into constant pool entries if they don't fit in
497 the insn. */
498
499 static int constant_pool_entries_cost;
500
501 /* Bits describing what kind of values in memory must be invalidated
502 for a particular instruction. If all three bits are zero,
503 no memory refs need to be invalidated. Each bit is more powerful
504 than the preceding ones, and if a bit is set then the preceding
505 bits are also set.
506
507 Here is how the bits are set:
508 Pushing onto the stack invalidates only the stack pointer,
509 writing at a fixed address invalidates only variable addresses,
510 writing in a structure element at variable address
511 invalidates all but scalar variables,
512 and writing in anything else at variable address invalidates everything. */
513
514 struct write_data
515 {
516 int sp : 1; /* Invalidate stack pointer. */
517 int var : 1; /* Invalidate variable addresses. */
518 int nonscalar : 1; /* Invalidate all but scalar variables. */
519 int all : 1; /* Invalidate all memory refs. */
520 };
521
522 /* Define maximum length of a branch path. */
523
524 #define PATHLENGTH 10
525
526 /* This data describes a block that will be processed by cse_basic_block. */
527
528 struct cse_basic_block_data {
529 /* Lowest CUID value of insns in block. */
530 int low_cuid;
531 /* Highest CUID value of insns in block. */
532 int high_cuid;
533 /* Total number of SETs in block. */
534 int nsets;
535 /* Last insn in the block. */
536 rtx last;
537 /* Size of current branch path, if any. */
538 int path_size;
539 /* Current branch path, indicating which branches will be taken. */
540 struct branch_path {
541 /* The branch insn. */
542 rtx branch;
543 /* Whether it should be taken or not. AROUND is the same as taken
544 except that it is used when the destination label is not preceded
545 by a BARRIER. */
546 enum taken {TAKEN, NOT_TAKEN, AROUND} status;
547 } path[PATHLENGTH];
548 };
549
550 /* Nonzero if X has the form (PLUS frame-pointer integer). We check for
551 virtual regs here because the simplify_*_operation routines are called
552 by integrate.c, which is called before virtual register instantiation. */
553
554 #define FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P(X) \
555 ((X) == frame_pointer_rtx || (X) == arg_pointer_rtx \
556 || (X) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
557 || (X) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx \
558 || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
559 && (XEXP (X, 0) == frame_pointer_rtx \
560 || XEXP (X, 0) == arg_pointer_rtx \
561 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
562 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx)))
563
564 /* Similar, but also allows reference to the stack pointer.
565
566 This used to include FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P, however, we can't assume that
567 arg_pointer_rtx by itself is nonzero, because on at least one machine,
568 the i960, the arg pointer is zero when it is unused. */
569
570 #define NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P(X) \
571 ((X) == frame_pointer_rtx \
572 || (X) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
573 || (X) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx \
574 || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
575 && (XEXP (X, 0) == frame_pointer_rtx \
576 || XEXP (X, 0) == arg_pointer_rtx \
577 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
578 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx)) \
579 || (X) == stack_pointer_rtx \
580 || (X) == virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx \
581 || (X) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx \
582 || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
583 && (XEXP (X, 0) == stack_pointer_rtx \
584 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx \
585 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx)))
586
587 static void new_basic_block PROTO((void));
588 static void make_new_qty PROTO((int));
589 static void make_regs_eqv PROTO((int, int));
590 static void delete_reg_equiv PROTO((int));
591 static int mention_regs PROTO((rtx));
592 static int insert_regs PROTO((rtx, struct table_elt *, int));
593 static void free_element PROTO((struct table_elt *));
594 static void remove_from_table PROTO((struct table_elt *, int));
595 static struct table_elt *get_element PROTO((void));
596 static struct table_elt *lookup PROTO((rtx, int, enum machine_mode)),
597 *lookup_for_remove PROTO((rtx, int, enum machine_mode));
598 static rtx lookup_as_function PROTO((rtx, enum rtx_code));
599 static struct table_elt *insert PROTO((rtx, struct table_elt *, int,
600 enum machine_mode));
601 static void merge_equiv_classes PROTO((struct table_elt *,
602 struct table_elt *));
603 static void invalidate PROTO((rtx));
604 static void remove_invalid_refs PROTO((int));
605 static void rehash_using_reg PROTO((rtx));
606 static void invalidate_memory PROTO((struct write_data *));
607 static void invalidate_for_call PROTO((void));
608 static rtx use_related_value PROTO((rtx, struct table_elt *));
609 static int canon_hash PROTO((rtx, enum machine_mode));
610 static int safe_hash PROTO((rtx, enum machine_mode));
611 static int exp_equiv_p PROTO((rtx, rtx, int, int));
612 static void set_nonvarying_address_components PROTO((rtx, int, rtx *,
613 HOST_WIDE_INT *,
614 HOST_WIDE_INT *));
615 static int refers_to_p PROTO((rtx, rtx));
616 static int refers_to_mem_p PROTO((rtx, rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT,
617 HOST_WIDE_INT));
618 static int cse_rtx_addr_varies_p PROTO((rtx));
619 static rtx canon_reg PROTO((rtx, rtx));
620 static void find_best_addr PROTO((rtx, rtx *));
621 static enum rtx_code find_comparison_args PROTO((enum rtx_code, rtx *, rtx *,
622 enum machine_mode *,
623 enum machine_mode *));
624 static rtx cse_gen_binary PROTO((enum rtx_code, enum machine_mode,
625 rtx, rtx));
626 static rtx simplify_plus_minus PROTO((enum rtx_code, enum machine_mode,
627 rtx, rtx));
628 static rtx fold_rtx PROTO((rtx, rtx));
629 static rtx equiv_constant PROTO((rtx));
630 static void record_jump_equiv PROTO((rtx, int));
631 static void record_jump_cond PROTO((enum rtx_code, enum machine_mode,
632 rtx, rtx, int));
633 static void cse_insn PROTO((rtx, int));
634 static void note_mem_written PROTO((rtx, struct write_data *));
635 static void invalidate_from_clobbers PROTO((struct write_data *, rtx));
636 static rtx cse_process_notes PROTO((rtx, rtx));
637 static void cse_around_loop PROTO((rtx));
638 static void invalidate_skipped_set PROTO((rtx, rtx));
639 static void invalidate_skipped_block PROTO((rtx));
640 static void cse_check_loop_start PROTO((rtx, rtx));
641 static void cse_set_around_loop PROTO((rtx, rtx, rtx));
642 static rtx cse_basic_block PROTO((rtx, rtx, struct branch_path *, int));
643 static void count_reg_usage PROTO((rtx, int *, int));
644 \f
645 /* Return an estimate of the cost of computing rtx X.
646 One use is in cse, to decide which expression to keep in the hash table.
647 Another is in rtl generation, to pick the cheapest way to multiply.
648 Other uses like the latter are expected in the future. */
649
650 /* Return the right cost to give to an operation
651 to make the cost of the corresponding register-to-register instruction
652 N times that of a fast register-to-register instruction. */
653
654 #define COSTS_N_INSNS(N) ((N) * 4 - 2)
655
656 int
657 rtx_cost (x, outer_code)
658 rtx x;
659 enum rtx_code outer_code;
660 {
661 register int i, j;
662 register enum rtx_code code;
663 register char *fmt;
664 register int total;
665
666 if (x == 0)
667 return 0;
668
669 /* Compute the default costs of certain things.
670 Note that RTX_COSTS can override the defaults. */
671
672 code = GET_CODE (x);
673 switch (code)
674 {
675 case MULT:
676 /* Count multiplication by 2**n as a shift,
677 because if we are considering it, we would output it as a shift. */
678 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT
679 && exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))) >= 0)
680 total = 2;
681 else
682 total = COSTS_N_INSNS (5);
683 break;
684 case DIV:
685 case UDIV:
686 case MOD:
687 case UMOD:
688 total = COSTS_N_INSNS (7);
689 break;
690 case USE:
691 /* Used in loop.c and combine.c as a marker. */
692 total = 0;
693 break;
694 case ASM_OPERANDS:
695 /* We don't want these to be used in substitutions because
696 we have no way of validating the resulting insn. So assign
697 anything containing an ASM_OPERANDS a very high cost. */
698 total = 1000;
699 break;
700 default:
701 total = 2;
702 }
703
704 switch (code)
705 {
706 case REG:
707 return ! CHEAP_REG (REGNO (x));
708
709 case SUBREG:
710 /* If we can't tie these modes, make this expensive. The larger
711 the mode, the more expensive it is. */
712 if (! MODES_TIEABLE_P (GET_MODE (x), GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))))
713 return COSTS_N_INSNS (2
714 + GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) / UNITS_PER_WORD);
715 return 2;
716 #ifdef RTX_COSTS
717 RTX_COSTS (x, code, outer_code);
718 #endif
719 CONST_COSTS (x, code, outer_code);
720 }
721
722 /* Sum the costs of the sub-rtx's, plus cost of this operation,
723 which is already in total. */
724
725 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
726 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
727 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
728 total += rtx_cost (XEXP (x, i), code);
729 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
730 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
731 total += rtx_cost (XVECEXP (x, i, j), code);
732
733 return total;
734 }
735 \f
736 /* Clear the hash table and initialize each register with its own quantity,
737 for a new basic block. */
738
739 static void
740 new_basic_block ()
741 {
742 register int i;
743
744 next_qty = max_reg;
745
746 bzero (reg_tick, max_reg * sizeof (int));
747
748 bcopy (all_minus_one, reg_in_table, max_reg * sizeof (int));
749 bcopy (consec_ints, reg_qty, max_reg * sizeof (int));
750 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (hard_regs_in_table);
751
752 /* The per-quantity values used to be initialized here, but it is
753 much faster to initialize each as it is made in `make_new_qty'. */
754
755 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
756 {
757 register struct table_elt *this, *next;
758 for (this = table[i]; this; this = next)
759 {
760 next = this->next_same_hash;
761 free_element (this);
762 }
763 }
764
765 bzero (table, sizeof table);
766
767 prev_insn = 0;
768
769 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
770 prev_insn_cc0 = 0;
771 #endif
772 }
773
774 /* Say that register REG contains a quantity not in any register before
775 and initialize that quantity. */
776
777 static void
778 make_new_qty (reg)
779 register int reg;
780 {
781 register int q;
782
783 if (next_qty >= max_qty)
784 abort ();
785
786 q = reg_qty[reg] = next_qty++;
787 qty_first_reg[q] = reg;
788 qty_last_reg[q] = reg;
789 qty_const[q] = qty_const_insn[q] = 0;
790 qty_comparison_code[q] = UNKNOWN;
791
792 reg_next_eqv[reg] = reg_prev_eqv[reg] = -1;
793 }
794
795 /* Make reg NEW equivalent to reg OLD.
796 OLD is not changing; NEW is. */
797
798 static void
799 make_regs_eqv (new, old)
800 register int new, old;
801 {
802 register int lastr, firstr;
803 register int q = reg_qty[old];
804
805 /* Nothing should become eqv until it has a "non-invalid" qty number. */
806 if (! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (old))
807 abort ();
808
809 reg_qty[new] = q;
810 firstr = qty_first_reg[q];
811 lastr = qty_last_reg[q];
812
813 /* Prefer fixed hard registers to anything. Prefer pseudo regs to other
814 hard regs. Among pseudos, if NEW will live longer than any other reg
815 of the same qty, and that is beyond the current basic block,
816 make it the new canonical replacement for this qty. */
817 if (! (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (firstr))
818 /* Certain fixed registers might be of the class NO_REGS. This means
819 that not only can they not be allocated by the compiler, but
820 they cannot be used in substitutions or canonicalizations
821 either. */
822 && (new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER || REGNO_REG_CLASS (new) != NO_REGS)
823 && ((new < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (new))
824 || (new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
825 && (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
826 || ((uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[new]] > cse_basic_block_end
827 || (uid_cuid[regno_first_uid[new]]
828 < cse_basic_block_start))
829 && (uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[new]]
830 > uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[firstr]]))))))
831 {
832 reg_prev_eqv[firstr] = new;
833 reg_next_eqv[new] = firstr;
834 reg_prev_eqv[new] = -1;
835 qty_first_reg[q] = new;
836 }
837 else
838 {
839 /* If NEW is a hard reg (known to be non-fixed), insert at end.
840 Otherwise, insert before any non-fixed hard regs that are at the
841 end. Registers of class NO_REGS cannot be used as an
842 equivalent for anything. */
843 while (lastr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && reg_prev_eqv[lastr] >= 0
844 && (REGNO_REG_CLASS (lastr) == NO_REGS || ! FIXED_REGNO_P (lastr))
845 && new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
846 lastr = reg_prev_eqv[lastr];
847 reg_next_eqv[new] = reg_next_eqv[lastr];
848 if (reg_next_eqv[lastr] >= 0)
849 reg_prev_eqv[reg_next_eqv[lastr]] = new;
850 else
851 qty_last_reg[q] = new;
852 reg_next_eqv[lastr] = new;
853 reg_prev_eqv[new] = lastr;
854 }
855 }
856
857 /* Remove REG from its equivalence class. */
858
859 static void
860 delete_reg_equiv (reg)
861 register int reg;
862 {
863 register int n = reg_next_eqv[reg];
864 register int p = reg_prev_eqv[reg];
865 register int q = reg_qty[reg];
866
867 /* If invalid, do nothing. N and P above are undefined in that case. */
868 if (q == reg)
869 return;
870
871 if (n != -1)
872 reg_prev_eqv[n] = p;
873 else
874 qty_last_reg[q] = p;
875 if (p != -1)
876 reg_next_eqv[p] = n;
877 else
878 qty_first_reg[q] = n;
879
880 reg_qty[reg] = reg;
881 }
882
883 /* Remove any invalid expressions from the hash table
884 that refer to any of the registers contained in expression X.
885
886 Make sure that newly inserted references to those registers
887 as subexpressions will be considered valid.
888
889 mention_regs is not called when a register itself
890 is being stored in the table.
891
892 Return 1 if we have done something that may have changed the hash code
893 of X. */
894
895 static int
896 mention_regs (x)
897 rtx x;
898 {
899 register enum rtx_code code;
900 register int i, j;
901 register char *fmt;
902 register int changed = 0;
903
904 if (x == 0)
905 return 0;
906
907 code = GET_CODE (x);
908 if (code == REG)
909 {
910 register int regno = REGNO (x);
911 register int endregno
912 = regno + (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1
913 : HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x)));
914 int i;
915
916 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
917 {
918 if (reg_in_table[i] >= 0 && reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i])
919 remove_invalid_refs (i);
920
921 reg_in_table[i] = reg_tick[i];
922 }
923
924 return 0;
925 }
926
927 /* If X is a comparison or a COMPARE and either operand is a register
928 that does not have a quantity, give it one. This is so that a later
929 call to record_jump_equiv won't cause X to be assigned a different
930 hash code and not found in the table after that call.
931
932 It is not necessary to do this here, since rehash_using_reg can
933 fix up the table later, but doing this here eliminates the need to
934 call that expensive function in the most common case where the only
935 use of the register is in the comparison. */
936
937 if (code == COMPARE || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '<')
938 {
939 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
940 && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))))
941 if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_PTR, 0))
942 {
943 rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 0));
944 changed = 1;
945 }
946
947 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == REG
948 && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 1))))
949 if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 1), NULL_PTR, 0))
950 {
951 rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 1));
952 changed = 1;
953 }
954 }
955
956 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
957 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
958 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
959 changed |= mention_regs (XEXP (x, i));
960 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
961 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
962 changed |= mention_regs (XVECEXP (x, i, j));
963
964 return changed;
965 }
966
967 /* Update the register quantities for inserting X into the hash table
968 with a value equivalent to CLASSP.
969 (If the class does not contain a REG, it is irrelevant.)
970 If MODIFIED is nonzero, X is a destination; it is being modified.
971 Note that delete_reg_equiv should be called on a register
972 before insert_regs is done on that register with MODIFIED != 0.
973
974 Nonzero value means that elements of reg_qty have changed
975 so X's hash code may be different. */
976
977 static int
978 insert_regs (x, classp, modified)
979 rtx x;
980 struct table_elt *classp;
981 int modified;
982 {
983 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
984 {
985 register int regno = REGNO (x);
986
987 /* If REGNO is in the equivalence table already but is of the
988 wrong mode for that equivalence, don't do anything here. */
989
990 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (regno)
991 && qty_mode[reg_qty[regno]] != GET_MODE (x))
992 return 0;
993
994 if (modified || ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (regno))
995 {
996 if (classp)
997 for (classp = classp->first_same_value;
998 classp != 0;
999 classp = classp->next_same_value)
1000 if (GET_CODE (classp->exp) == REG
1001 && GET_MODE (classp->exp) == GET_MODE (x))
1002 {
1003 make_regs_eqv (regno, REGNO (classp->exp));
1004 return 1;
1005 }
1006
1007 make_new_qty (regno);
1008 qty_mode[reg_qty[regno]] = GET_MODE (x);
1009 return 1;
1010 }
1011 }
1012
1013 /* If X is a SUBREG, we will likely be inserting the inner register in the
1014 table. If that register doesn't have an assigned quantity number at
1015 this point but does later, the insertion that we will be doing now will
1016 not be accessible because its hash code will have changed. So assign
1017 a quantity number now. */
1018
1019 else if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) == REG
1020 && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x))))
1021 {
1022 insert_regs (SUBREG_REG (x), NULL_PTR, 0);
1023 mention_regs (SUBREG_REG (x));
1024 return 1;
1025 }
1026 else
1027 return mention_regs (x);
1028 }
1029 \f
1030 /* Look in or update the hash table. */
1031
1032 /* Put the element ELT on the list of free elements. */
1033
1034 static void
1035 free_element (elt)
1036 struct table_elt *elt;
1037 {
1038 elt->next_same_hash = free_element_chain;
1039 free_element_chain = elt;
1040 }
1041
1042 /* Return an element that is free for use. */
1043
1044 static struct table_elt *
1045 get_element ()
1046 {
1047 struct table_elt *elt = free_element_chain;
1048 if (elt)
1049 {
1050 free_element_chain = elt->next_same_hash;
1051 return elt;
1052 }
1053 n_elements_made++;
1054 return (struct table_elt *) oballoc (sizeof (struct table_elt));
1055 }
1056
1057 /* Remove table element ELT from use in the table.
1058 HASH is its hash code, made using the HASH macro.
1059 It's an argument because often that is known in advance
1060 and we save much time not recomputing it. */
1061
1062 static void
1063 remove_from_table (elt, hash)
1064 register struct table_elt *elt;
1065 int hash;
1066 {
1067 if (elt == 0)
1068 return;
1069
1070 /* Mark this element as removed. See cse_insn. */
1071 elt->first_same_value = 0;
1072
1073 /* Remove the table element from its equivalence class. */
1074
1075 {
1076 register struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_value;
1077 register struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_value;
1078
1079 if (next) next->prev_same_value = prev;
1080
1081 if (prev)
1082 prev->next_same_value = next;
1083 else
1084 {
1085 register struct table_elt *newfirst = next;
1086 while (next)
1087 {
1088 next->first_same_value = newfirst;
1089 next = next->next_same_value;
1090 }
1091 }
1092 }
1093
1094 /* Remove the table element from its hash bucket. */
1095
1096 {
1097 register struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_hash;
1098 register struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_hash;
1099
1100 if (next) next->prev_same_hash = prev;
1101
1102 if (prev)
1103 prev->next_same_hash = next;
1104 else if (table[hash] == elt)
1105 table[hash] = next;
1106 else
1107 {
1108 /* This entry is not in the proper hash bucket. This can happen
1109 when two classes were merged by `merge_equiv_classes'. Search
1110 for the hash bucket that it heads. This happens only very
1111 rarely, so the cost is acceptable. */
1112 for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
1113 if (table[hash] == elt)
1114 table[hash] = next;
1115 }
1116 }
1117
1118 /* Remove the table element from its related-value circular chain. */
1119
1120 if (elt->related_value != 0 && elt->related_value != elt)
1121 {
1122 register struct table_elt *p = elt->related_value;
1123 while (p->related_value != elt)
1124 p = p->related_value;
1125 p->related_value = elt->related_value;
1126 if (p->related_value == p)
1127 p->related_value = 0;
1128 }
1129
1130 free_element (elt);
1131 }
1132
1133 /* Look up X in the hash table and return its table element,
1134 or 0 if X is not in the table.
1135
1136 MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
1137 with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
1138
1139 Here we are satisfied to find an expression whose tree structure
1140 looks like X. */
1141
1142 static struct table_elt *
1143 lookup (x, hash, mode)
1144 rtx x;
1145 int hash;
1146 enum machine_mode mode;
1147 {
1148 register struct table_elt *p;
1149
1150 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1151 if (mode == p->mode && ((x == p->exp && GET_CODE (x) == REG)
1152 || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, GET_CODE (x) != REG, 0)))
1153 return p;
1154
1155 return 0;
1156 }
1157
1158 /* Like `lookup' but don't care whether the table element uses invalid regs.
1159 Also ignore discrepancies in the machine mode of a register. */
1160
1161 static struct table_elt *
1162 lookup_for_remove (x, hash, mode)
1163 rtx x;
1164 int hash;
1165 enum machine_mode mode;
1166 {
1167 register struct table_elt *p;
1168
1169 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
1170 {
1171 int regno = REGNO (x);
1172 /* Don't check the machine mode when comparing registers;
1173 invalidating (REG:SI 0) also invalidates (REG:DF 0). */
1174 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1175 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
1176 && REGNO (p->exp) == regno)
1177 return p;
1178 }
1179 else
1180 {
1181 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1182 if (mode == p->mode && (x == p->exp || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, 0, 0)))
1183 return p;
1184 }
1185
1186 return 0;
1187 }
1188
1189 /* Look for an expression equivalent to X and with code CODE.
1190 If one is found, return that expression. */
1191
1192 static rtx
1193 lookup_as_function (x, code)
1194 rtx x;
1195 enum rtx_code code;
1196 {
1197 register struct table_elt *p = lookup (x, safe_hash (x, VOIDmode) % NBUCKETS,
1198 GET_MODE (x));
1199 if (p == 0)
1200 return 0;
1201
1202 for (p = p->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
1203 {
1204 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == code
1205 /* Make sure this is a valid entry in the table. */
1206 && exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
1207 return p->exp;
1208 }
1209
1210 return 0;
1211 }
1212
1213 /* Insert X in the hash table, assuming HASH is its hash code
1214 and CLASSP is an element of the class it should go in
1215 (or 0 if a new class should be made).
1216 It is inserted at the proper position to keep the class in
1217 the order cheapest first.
1218
1219 MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
1220 with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
1221
1222 For elements of equal cheapness, the most recent one
1223 goes in front, except that the first element in the list
1224 remains first unless a cheaper element is added. The order of
1225 pseudo-registers does not matter, as canon_reg will be called to
1226 find the cheapest when a register is retrieved from the table.
1227
1228 The in_memory field in the hash table element is set to 0.
1229 The caller must set it nonzero if appropriate.
1230
1231 You should call insert_regs (X, CLASSP, MODIFY) before calling here,
1232 and if insert_regs returns a nonzero value
1233 you must then recompute its hash code before calling here.
1234
1235 If necessary, update table showing constant values of quantities. */
1236
1237 #define CHEAPER(X,Y) ((X)->cost < (Y)->cost)
1238
1239 static struct table_elt *
1240 insert (x, classp, hash, mode)
1241 register rtx x;
1242 register struct table_elt *classp;
1243 int hash;
1244 enum machine_mode mode;
1245 {
1246 register struct table_elt *elt;
1247
1248 /* If X is a register and we haven't made a quantity for it,
1249 something is wrong. */
1250 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
1251 abort ();
1252
1253 /* If X is a hard register, show it is being put in the table. */
1254 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1255 {
1256 int regno = REGNO (x);
1257 int endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x));
1258 int i;
1259
1260 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
1261 SET_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
1262 }
1263
1264
1265 /* Put an element for X into the right hash bucket. */
1266
1267 elt = get_element ();
1268 elt->exp = x;
1269 elt->cost = COST (x);
1270 elt->next_same_value = 0;
1271 elt->prev_same_value = 0;
1272 elt->next_same_hash = table[hash];
1273 elt->prev_same_hash = 0;
1274 elt->related_value = 0;
1275 elt->in_memory = 0;
1276 elt->mode = mode;
1277 elt->is_const = (CONSTANT_P (x)
1278 /* GNU C++ takes advantage of this for `this'
1279 (and other const values). */
1280 || (RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x)
1281 && GET_CODE (x) == REG
1282 && REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1283 || FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P (x));
1284
1285 if (table[hash])
1286 table[hash]->prev_same_hash = elt;
1287 table[hash] = elt;
1288
1289 /* Put it into the proper value-class. */
1290 if (classp)
1291 {
1292 classp = classp->first_same_value;
1293 if (CHEAPER (elt, classp))
1294 /* Insert at the head of the class */
1295 {
1296 register struct table_elt *p;
1297 elt->next_same_value = classp;
1298 classp->prev_same_value = elt;
1299 elt->first_same_value = elt;
1300
1301 for (p = classp; p; p = p->next_same_value)
1302 p->first_same_value = elt;
1303 }
1304 else
1305 {
1306 /* Insert not at head of the class. */
1307 /* Put it after the last element cheaper than X. */
1308 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1309 for (p = classp; (next = p->next_same_value) && CHEAPER (next, elt);
1310 p = next);
1311 /* Put it after P and before NEXT. */
1312 elt->next_same_value = next;
1313 if (next)
1314 next->prev_same_value = elt;
1315 elt->prev_same_value = p;
1316 p->next_same_value = elt;
1317 elt->first_same_value = classp;
1318 }
1319 }
1320 else
1321 elt->first_same_value = elt;
1322
1323 /* If this is a constant being set equivalent to a register or a register
1324 being set equivalent to a constant, note the constant equivalence.
1325
1326 If this is a constant, it cannot be equivalent to a different constant,
1327 and a constant is the only thing that can be cheaper than a register. So
1328 we know the register is the head of the class (before the constant was
1329 inserted).
1330
1331 If this is a register that is not already known equivalent to a
1332 constant, we must check the entire class.
1333
1334 If this is a register that is already known equivalent to an insn,
1335 update `qty_const_insn' to show that `this_insn' is the latest
1336 insn making that quantity equivalent to the constant. */
1337
1338 if (elt->is_const && classp && GET_CODE (classp->exp) == REG)
1339 {
1340 qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]]
1341 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]], x);
1342 qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]] = this_insn;
1343 }
1344
1345 else if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && classp && ! qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
1346 {
1347 register struct table_elt *p;
1348
1349 for (p = classp; p != 0; p = p->next_same_value)
1350 {
1351 if (p->is_const)
1352 {
1353 qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
1354 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), p->exp);
1355 qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]] = this_insn;
1356 break;
1357 }
1358 }
1359 }
1360
1361 else if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
1362 && GET_MODE (x) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
1363 qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]] = this_insn;
1364
1365 /* If this is a constant with symbolic value,
1366 and it has a term with an explicit integer value,
1367 link it up with related expressions. */
1368 if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
1369 {
1370 rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
1371 int subhash;
1372 struct table_elt *subelt, *subelt_prev;
1373
1374 if (subexp != 0)
1375 {
1376 /* Get the integer-free subexpression in the hash table. */
1377 subhash = safe_hash (subexp, mode) % NBUCKETS;
1378 subelt = lookup (subexp, subhash, mode);
1379 if (subelt == 0)
1380 subelt = insert (subexp, NULL_PTR, subhash, mode);
1381 /* Initialize SUBELT's circular chain if it has none. */
1382 if (subelt->related_value == 0)
1383 subelt->related_value = subelt;
1384 /* Find the element in the circular chain that precedes SUBELT. */
1385 subelt_prev = subelt;
1386 while (subelt_prev->related_value != subelt)
1387 subelt_prev = subelt_prev->related_value;
1388 /* Put new ELT into SUBELT's circular chain just before SUBELT.
1389 This way the element that follows SUBELT is the oldest one. */
1390 elt->related_value = subelt_prev->related_value;
1391 subelt_prev->related_value = elt;
1392 }
1393 }
1394
1395 return elt;
1396 }
1397 \f
1398 /* Given two equivalence classes, CLASS1 and CLASS2, put all the entries from
1399 CLASS2 into CLASS1. This is done when we have reached an insn which makes
1400 the two classes equivalent.
1401
1402 CLASS1 will be the surviving class; CLASS2 should not be used after this
1403 call.
1404
1405 Any invalid entries in CLASS2 will not be copied. */
1406
1407 static void
1408 merge_equiv_classes (class1, class2)
1409 struct table_elt *class1, *class2;
1410 {
1411 struct table_elt *elt, *next, *new;
1412
1413 /* Ensure we start with the head of the classes. */
1414 class1 = class1->first_same_value;
1415 class2 = class2->first_same_value;
1416
1417 /* If they were already equal, forget it. */
1418 if (class1 == class2)
1419 return;
1420
1421 for (elt = class2; elt; elt = next)
1422 {
1423 int hash;
1424 rtx exp = elt->exp;
1425 enum machine_mode mode = elt->mode;
1426
1427 next = elt->next_same_value;
1428
1429 /* Remove old entry, make a new one in CLASS1's class.
1430 Don't do this for invalid entries as we cannot find their
1431 hash code (it also isn't necessary). */
1432 if (GET_CODE (exp) == REG || exp_equiv_p (exp, exp, 1, 0))
1433 {
1434 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
1435 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
1436 hash = HASH (exp, mode);
1437
1438 if (GET_CODE (exp) == REG)
1439 delete_reg_equiv (REGNO (exp));
1440
1441 remove_from_table (elt, hash);
1442
1443 if (insert_regs (exp, class1, 0))
1444 hash = HASH (exp, mode);
1445 new = insert (exp, class1, hash, mode);
1446 new->in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
1447 new->in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
1448 }
1449 }
1450 }
1451 \f
1452 /* Remove from the hash table, or mark as invalid,
1453 all expressions whose values could be altered by storing in X.
1454 X is a register, a subreg, or a memory reference with nonvarying address
1455 (because, when a memory reference with a varying address is stored in,
1456 all memory references are removed by invalidate_memory
1457 so specific invalidation is superfluous).
1458
1459 A nonvarying address may be just a register or just
1460 a symbol reference, or it may be either of those plus
1461 a numeric offset. */
1462
1463 static void
1464 invalidate (x)
1465 rtx x;
1466 {
1467 register int i;
1468 register struct table_elt *p;
1469 rtx base;
1470 HOST_WIDE_INT start, end;
1471
1472 /* If X is a register, dependencies on its contents
1473 are recorded through the qty number mechanism.
1474 Just change the qty number of the register,
1475 mark it as invalid for expressions that refer to it,
1476 and remove it itself. */
1477
1478 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
1479 {
1480 register int regno = REGNO (x);
1481 register int hash = HASH (x, GET_MODE (x));
1482
1483 /* Remove REGNO from any quantity list it might be on and indicate
1484 that it's value might have changed. If it is a pseudo, remove its
1485 entry from the hash table.
1486
1487 For a hard register, we do the first two actions above for any
1488 additional hard registers corresponding to X. Then, if any of these
1489 registers are in the table, we must remove any REG entries that
1490 overlap these registers. */
1491
1492 delete_reg_equiv (regno);
1493 reg_tick[regno]++;
1494
1495 if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1496 remove_from_table (lookup_for_remove (x, hash, GET_MODE (x)), hash);
1497 else
1498 {
1499 HOST_WIDE_INT in_table
1500 = TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
1501 int endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x));
1502 int tregno, tendregno;
1503 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1504
1505 CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
1506
1507 for (i = regno + 1; i < endregno; i++)
1508 {
1509 in_table |= TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
1510 CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
1511 delete_reg_equiv (i);
1512 reg_tick[i]++;
1513 }
1514
1515 if (in_table)
1516 for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
1517 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
1518 {
1519 next = p->next_same_hash;
1520
1521 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
1522 || REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1523 continue;
1524
1525 tregno = REGNO (p->exp);
1526 tendregno
1527 = tregno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (tregno, GET_MODE (p->exp));
1528 if (tendregno > regno && tregno < endregno)
1529 remove_from_table (p, hash);
1530 }
1531 }
1532
1533 return;
1534 }
1535
1536 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
1537 {
1538 if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) != REG)
1539 abort ();
1540 invalidate (SUBREG_REG (x));
1541 return;
1542 }
1543
1544 /* X is not a register; it must be a memory reference with
1545 a nonvarying address. Remove all hash table elements
1546 that refer to overlapping pieces of memory. */
1547
1548 if (GET_CODE (x) != MEM)
1549 abort ();
1550
1551 set_nonvarying_address_components (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)),
1552 &base, &start, &end);
1553
1554 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1555 {
1556 register struct table_elt *next;
1557 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1558 {
1559 next = p->next_same_hash;
1560 if (refers_to_mem_p (p->exp, base, start, end))
1561 remove_from_table (p, i);
1562 }
1563 }
1564 }
1565
1566 /* Remove all expressions that refer to register REGNO,
1567 since they are already invalid, and we are about to
1568 mark that register valid again and don't want the old
1569 expressions to reappear as valid. */
1570
1571 static void
1572 remove_invalid_refs (regno)
1573 int regno;
1574 {
1575 register int i;
1576 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1577
1578 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1579 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1580 {
1581 next = p->next_same_hash;
1582 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
1583 && refers_to_regno_p (regno, regno + 1, p->exp, NULL_PTR))
1584 remove_from_table (p, i);
1585 }
1586 }
1587 \f
1588 /* Recompute the hash codes of any valid entries in the hash table that
1589 reference X, if X is a register, or SUBREG_REG (X) if X is a SUBREG.
1590
1591 This is called when we make a jump equivalence. */
1592
1593 static void
1594 rehash_using_reg (x)
1595 rtx x;
1596 {
1597 int i;
1598 struct table_elt *p, *next;
1599 int hash;
1600
1601 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
1602 x = SUBREG_REG (x);
1603
1604 /* If X is not a register or if the register is known not to be in any
1605 valid entries in the table, we have no work to do. */
1606
1607 if (GET_CODE (x) != REG
1608 || reg_in_table[REGNO (x)] < 0
1609 || reg_in_table[REGNO (x)] != reg_tick[REGNO (x)])
1610 return;
1611
1612 /* Scan all hash chains looking for valid entries that mention X.
1613 If we find one and it is in the wrong hash chain, move it. We can skip
1614 objects that are registers, since they are handled specially. */
1615
1616 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1617 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1618 {
1619 next = p->next_same_hash;
1620 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG && reg_mentioned_p (x, p->exp)
1621 && exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0)
1622 && i != (hash = safe_hash (p->exp, p->mode) % NBUCKETS))
1623 {
1624 if (p->next_same_hash)
1625 p->next_same_hash->prev_same_hash = p->prev_same_hash;
1626
1627 if (p->prev_same_hash)
1628 p->prev_same_hash->next_same_hash = p->next_same_hash;
1629 else
1630 table[i] = p->next_same_hash;
1631
1632 p->next_same_hash = table[hash];
1633 p->prev_same_hash = 0;
1634 if (table[hash])
1635 table[hash]->prev_same_hash = p;
1636 table[hash] = p;
1637 }
1638 }
1639 }
1640 \f
1641 /* Remove from the hash table all expressions that reference memory,
1642 or some of them as specified by *WRITES. */
1643
1644 static void
1645 invalidate_memory (writes)
1646 struct write_data *writes;
1647 {
1648 register int i;
1649 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1650 int all = writes->all;
1651 int nonscalar = writes->nonscalar;
1652
1653 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1654 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1655 {
1656 next = p->next_same_hash;
1657 if (p->in_memory
1658 && (all
1659 || (nonscalar && p->in_struct)
1660 || cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (p->exp)))
1661 remove_from_table (p, i);
1662 }
1663 }
1664 \f
1665 /* Remove from the hash table any expression that is a call-clobbered
1666 register. Also update their TICK values. */
1667
1668 static void
1669 invalidate_for_call ()
1670 {
1671 int regno, endregno;
1672 int i;
1673 int hash;
1674 struct table_elt *p, *next;
1675 int in_table = 0;
1676
1677 /* Go through all the hard registers. For each that is clobbered in
1678 a CALL_INSN, remove the register from quantity chains and update
1679 reg_tick if defined. Also see if any of these registers is currently
1680 in the table. */
1681
1682 for (regno = 0; regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; regno++)
1683 if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, regno))
1684 {
1685 delete_reg_equiv (regno);
1686 if (reg_tick[regno] >= 0)
1687 reg_tick[regno]++;
1688
1689 in_table |= TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
1690 }
1691
1692 /* In the case where we have no call-clobbered hard registers in the
1693 table, we are done. Otherwise, scan the table and remove any
1694 entry that overlaps a call-clobbered register. */
1695
1696 if (in_table)
1697 for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
1698 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
1699 {
1700 next = p->next_same_hash;
1701
1702 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
1703 || REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1704 continue;
1705
1706 regno = REGNO (p->exp);
1707 endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (p->exp));
1708
1709 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
1710 if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, i))
1711 {
1712 remove_from_table (p, hash);
1713 break;
1714 }
1715 }
1716 }
1717 \f
1718 /* Given an expression X of type CONST,
1719 and ELT which is its table entry (or 0 if it
1720 is not in the hash table),
1721 return an alternate expression for X as a register plus integer.
1722 If none can be found, return 0. */
1723
1724 static rtx
1725 use_related_value (x, elt)
1726 rtx x;
1727 struct table_elt *elt;
1728 {
1729 register struct table_elt *relt = 0;
1730 register struct table_elt *p, *q;
1731 HOST_WIDE_INT offset;
1732
1733 /* First, is there anything related known?
1734 If we have a table element, we can tell from that.
1735 Otherwise, must look it up. */
1736
1737 if (elt != 0 && elt->related_value != 0)
1738 relt = elt;
1739 else if (elt == 0 && GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
1740 {
1741 rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
1742 if (subexp != 0)
1743 relt = lookup (subexp,
1744 safe_hash (subexp, GET_MODE (subexp)) % NBUCKETS,
1745 GET_MODE (subexp));
1746 }
1747
1748 if (relt == 0)
1749 return 0;
1750
1751 /* Search all related table entries for one that has an
1752 equivalent register. */
1753
1754 p = relt;
1755 while (1)
1756 {
1757 /* This loop is strange in that it is executed in two different cases.
1758 The first is when X is already in the table. Then it is searching
1759 the RELATED_VALUE list of X's class (RELT). The second case is when
1760 X is not in the table. Then RELT points to a class for the related
1761 value.
1762
1763 Ensure that, whatever case we are in, that we ignore classes that have
1764 the same value as X. */
1765
1766 if (rtx_equal_p (x, p->exp))
1767 q = 0;
1768 else
1769 for (q = p->first_same_value; q; q = q->next_same_value)
1770 if (GET_CODE (q->exp) == REG)
1771 break;
1772
1773 if (q)
1774 break;
1775
1776 p = p->related_value;
1777
1778 /* We went all the way around, so there is nothing to be found.
1779 Alternatively, perhaps RELT was in the table for some other reason
1780 and it has no related values recorded. */
1781 if (p == relt || p == 0)
1782 break;
1783 }
1784
1785 if (q == 0)
1786 return 0;
1787
1788 offset = (get_integer_term (x) - get_integer_term (p->exp));
1789 /* Note: OFFSET may be 0 if P->xexp and X are related by commutativity. */
1790 return plus_constant (q->exp, offset);
1791 }
1792 \f
1793 /* Hash an rtx. We are careful to make sure the value is never negative.
1794 Equivalent registers hash identically.
1795 MODE is used in hashing for CONST_INTs only;
1796 otherwise the mode of X is used.
1797
1798 Store 1 in do_not_record if any subexpression is volatile.
1799
1800 Store 1 in hash_arg_in_memory if X contains a MEM rtx
1801 which does not have the RTX_UNCHANGING_P bit set.
1802 In this case, also store 1 in hash_arg_in_struct
1803 if there is a MEM rtx which has the MEM_IN_STRUCT_P bit set.
1804
1805 Note that cse_insn knows that the hash code of a MEM expression
1806 is just (int) MEM plus the hash code of the address. */
1807
1808 static int
1809 canon_hash (x, mode)
1810 rtx x;
1811 enum machine_mode mode;
1812 {
1813 register int i, j;
1814 register int hash = 0;
1815 register enum rtx_code code;
1816 register char *fmt;
1817
1818 /* repeat is used to turn tail-recursion into iteration. */
1819 repeat:
1820 if (x == 0)
1821 return hash;
1822
1823 code = GET_CODE (x);
1824 switch (code)
1825 {
1826 case REG:
1827 {
1828 register int regno = REGNO (x);
1829
1830 /* On some machines, we can't record any non-fixed hard register,
1831 because extending its life will cause reload problems. We
1832 consider ap, fp, and sp to be fixed for this purpose.
1833 On all machines, we can't record any global registers. */
1834
1835 if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1836 && (global_regs[regno]
1837 #ifdef SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
1838 || (! fixed_regs[regno]
1839 && regno != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
1840 && regno != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
1841 && regno != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
1842 #endif
1843 ))
1844 {
1845 do_not_record = 1;
1846 return 0;
1847 }
1848 return hash + ((int) REG << 7) + reg_qty[regno];
1849 }
1850
1851 case CONST_INT:
1852 hash += ((int) mode + ((int) CONST_INT << 7)
1853 + INTVAL (x) + (INTVAL (x) >> HASHBITS));
1854 return ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & hash;
1855
1856 case CONST_DOUBLE:
1857 /* This is like the general case, except that it only counts
1858 the integers representing the constant. */
1859 hash += (int) code + (int) GET_MODE (x);
1860 {
1861 int i;
1862 for (i = 2; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (CONST_DOUBLE); i++)
1863 {
1864 int tem = XINT (x, i);
1865 hash += ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & (tem + (tem >> HASHBITS));
1866 }
1867 }
1868 return hash;
1869
1870 /* Assume there is only one rtx object for any given label. */
1871 case LABEL_REF:
1872 /* Use `and' to ensure a positive number. */
1873 return (hash + ((HOST_WIDE_INT) LABEL_REF << 7)
1874 + ((HOST_WIDE_INT) XEXP (x, 0) & ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1)));
1875
1876 case SYMBOL_REF:
1877 return (hash + ((HOST_WIDE_INT) SYMBOL_REF << 7)
1878 + ((HOST_WIDE_INT) XEXP (x, 0) & ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1)));
1879
1880 case MEM:
1881 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
1882 {
1883 do_not_record = 1;
1884 return 0;
1885 }
1886 if (! RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x))
1887 {
1888 hash_arg_in_memory = 1;
1889 if (MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (x)) hash_arg_in_struct = 1;
1890 }
1891 /* Now that we have already found this special case,
1892 might as well speed it up as much as possible. */
1893 hash += (int) MEM;
1894 x = XEXP (x, 0);
1895 goto repeat;
1896
1897 case PRE_DEC:
1898 case PRE_INC:
1899 case POST_DEC:
1900 case POST_INC:
1901 case PC:
1902 case CC0:
1903 case CALL:
1904 case UNSPEC_VOLATILE:
1905 do_not_record = 1;
1906 return 0;
1907
1908 case ASM_OPERANDS:
1909 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
1910 {
1911 do_not_record = 1;
1912 return 0;
1913 }
1914 }
1915
1916 i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1;
1917 hash += (int) code + (int) GET_MODE (x);
1918 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
1919 for (; i >= 0; i--)
1920 {
1921 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
1922 {
1923 rtx tem = XEXP (x, i);
1924 rtx tem1;
1925
1926 /* If the operand is a REG that is equivalent to a constant, hash
1927 as if we were hashing the constant, since we will be comparing
1928 that way. */
1929 if (tem != 0 && GET_CODE (tem) == REG
1930 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (tem))
1931 && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (tem)]] == GET_MODE (tem)
1932 && (tem1 = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (tem)]]) != 0
1933 && CONSTANT_P (tem1))
1934 tem = tem1;
1935
1936 /* If we are about to do the last recursive call
1937 needed at this level, change it into iteration.
1938 This function is called enough to be worth it. */
1939 if (i == 0)
1940 {
1941 x = tem;
1942 goto repeat;
1943 }
1944 hash += canon_hash (tem, 0);
1945 }
1946 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
1947 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
1948 hash += canon_hash (XVECEXP (x, i, j), 0);
1949 else if (fmt[i] == 's')
1950 {
1951 register char *p = XSTR (x, i);
1952 if (p)
1953 while (*p)
1954 {
1955 register int tem = *p++;
1956 hash += ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & (tem + (tem >> HASHBITS));
1957 }
1958 }
1959 else if (fmt[i] == 'i')
1960 {
1961 register int tem = XINT (x, i);
1962 hash += ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & (tem + (tem >> HASHBITS));
1963 }
1964 else
1965 abort ();
1966 }
1967 return hash;
1968 }
1969
1970 /* Like canon_hash but with no side effects. */
1971
1972 static int
1973 safe_hash (x, mode)
1974 rtx x;
1975 enum machine_mode mode;
1976 {
1977 int save_do_not_record = do_not_record;
1978 int save_hash_arg_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
1979 int save_hash_arg_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
1980 int hash = canon_hash (x, mode);
1981 hash_arg_in_memory = save_hash_arg_in_memory;
1982 hash_arg_in_struct = save_hash_arg_in_struct;
1983 do_not_record = save_do_not_record;
1984 return hash;
1985 }
1986 \f
1987 /* Return 1 iff X and Y would canonicalize into the same thing,
1988 without actually constructing the canonicalization of either one.
1989 If VALIDATE is nonzero,
1990 we assume X is an expression being processed from the rtl
1991 and Y was found in the hash table. We check register refs
1992 in Y for being marked as valid.
1993
1994 If EQUAL_VALUES is nonzero, we allow a register to match a constant value
1995 that is known to be in the register. Ordinarily, we don't allow them
1996 to match, because letting them match would cause unpredictable results
1997 in all the places that search a hash table chain for an equivalent
1998 for a given value. A possible equivalent that has different structure
1999 has its hash code computed from different data. Whether the hash code
2000 is the same as that of the the given value is pure luck. */
2001
2002 static int
2003 exp_equiv_p (x, y, validate, equal_values)
2004 rtx x, y;
2005 int validate;
2006 int equal_values;
2007 {
2008 register int i, j;
2009 register enum rtx_code code;
2010 register char *fmt;
2011
2012 /* Note: it is incorrect to assume an expression is equivalent to itself
2013 if VALIDATE is nonzero. */
2014 if (x == y && !validate)
2015 return 1;
2016 if (x == 0 || y == 0)
2017 return x == y;
2018
2019 code = GET_CODE (x);
2020 if (code != GET_CODE (y))
2021 {
2022 if (!equal_values)
2023 return 0;
2024
2025 /* If X is a constant and Y is a register or vice versa, they may be
2026 equivalent. We only have to validate if Y is a register. */
2027 if (CONSTANT_P (x) && GET_CODE (y) == REG
2028 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (y))
2029 && GET_MODE (y) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (y)]]
2030 && rtx_equal_p (x, qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (y)]])
2031 && (! validate || reg_in_table[REGNO (y)] == reg_tick[REGNO (y)]))
2032 return 1;
2033
2034 if (CONSTANT_P (y) && code == REG
2035 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
2036 && GET_MODE (x) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
2037 && rtx_equal_p (y, qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]))
2038 return 1;
2039
2040 return 0;
2041 }
2042
2043 /* (MULT:SI x y) and (MULT:HI x y) are NOT equivalent. */
2044 if (GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y))
2045 return 0;
2046
2047 switch (code)
2048 {
2049 case PC:
2050 case CC0:
2051 return x == y;
2052
2053 case CONST_INT:
2054 return INTVAL (x) == INTVAL (y);
2055
2056 case LABEL_REF:
2057 case SYMBOL_REF:
2058 return XEXP (x, 0) == XEXP (y, 0);
2059
2060 case REG:
2061 {
2062 int regno = REGNO (y);
2063 int endregno
2064 = regno + (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1
2065 : HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (y)));
2066 int i;
2067
2068 /* If the quantities are not the same, the expressions are not
2069 equivalent. If there are and we are not to validate, they
2070 are equivalent. Otherwise, ensure all regs are up-to-date. */
2071
2072 if (reg_qty[REGNO (x)] != reg_qty[regno])
2073 return 0;
2074
2075 if (! validate)
2076 return 1;
2077
2078 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
2079 if (reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i])
2080 return 0;
2081
2082 return 1;
2083 }
2084
2085 /* For commutative operations, check both orders. */
2086 case PLUS:
2087 case MULT:
2088 case AND:
2089 case IOR:
2090 case XOR:
2091 case NE:
2092 case EQ:
2093 return ((exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 0), validate, equal_values)
2094 && exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 1),
2095 validate, equal_values))
2096 || (exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 1),
2097 validate, equal_values)
2098 && exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 0),
2099 validate, equal_values)));
2100 }
2101
2102 /* Compare the elements. If any pair of corresponding elements
2103 fail to match, return 0 for the whole things. */
2104
2105 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2106 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2107 {
2108 switch (fmt[i])
2109 {
2110 case 'e':
2111 if (! exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, i), XEXP (y, i), validate, equal_values))
2112 return 0;
2113 break;
2114
2115 case 'E':
2116 if (XVECLEN (x, i) != XVECLEN (y, i))
2117 return 0;
2118 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2119 if (! exp_equiv_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), XVECEXP (y, i, j),
2120 validate, equal_values))
2121 return 0;
2122 break;
2123
2124 case 's':
2125 if (strcmp (XSTR (x, i), XSTR (y, i)))
2126 return 0;
2127 break;
2128
2129 case 'i':
2130 if (XINT (x, i) != XINT (y, i))
2131 return 0;
2132 break;
2133
2134 case 'w':
2135 if (XWINT (x, i) != XWINT (y, i))
2136 return 0;
2137 break;
2138
2139 case '0':
2140 break;
2141
2142 default:
2143 abort ();
2144 }
2145 }
2146
2147 return 1;
2148 }
2149 \f
2150 /* Return 1 iff any subexpression of X matches Y.
2151 Here we do not require that X or Y be valid (for registers referred to)
2152 for being in the hash table. */
2153
2154 static int
2155 refers_to_p (x, y)
2156 rtx x, y;
2157 {
2158 register int i;
2159 register enum rtx_code code;
2160 register char *fmt;
2161
2162 repeat:
2163 if (x == y)
2164 return 1;
2165 if (x == 0 || y == 0)
2166 return 0;
2167
2168 code = GET_CODE (x);
2169 /* If X as a whole has the same code as Y, they may match.
2170 If so, return 1. */
2171 if (code == GET_CODE (y))
2172 {
2173 if (exp_equiv_p (x, y, 0, 1))
2174 return 1;
2175 }
2176
2177 /* X does not match, so try its subexpressions. */
2178
2179 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2180 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2181 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2182 {
2183 if (i == 0)
2184 {
2185 x = XEXP (x, 0);
2186 goto repeat;
2187 }
2188 else
2189 if (refers_to_p (XEXP (x, i), y))
2190 return 1;
2191 }
2192 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2193 {
2194 int j;
2195 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2196 if (refers_to_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), y))
2197 return 1;
2198 }
2199
2200 return 0;
2201 }
2202 \f
2203 /* Given ADDR and SIZE (a memory address, and the size of the memory reference),
2204 set PBASE, PSTART, and PEND which correspond to the base of the address,
2205 the starting offset, and ending offset respectively.
2206
2207 ADDR is known to be a nonvarying address.
2208
2209 cse_address_varies_p returns zero for nonvarying addresses. */
2210
2211 static void
2212 set_nonvarying_address_components (addr, size, pbase, pstart, pend)
2213 rtx addr;
2214 int size;
2215 rtx *pbase;
2216 HOST_WIDE_INT *pstart, *pend;
2217 {
2218 rtx base;
2219 int start, end;
2220
2221 base = addr;
2222 start = 0;
2223 end = 0;
2224
2225 /* Registers with nonvarying addresses usually have constant equivalents;
2226 but the frame pointer register is also possible. */
2227 if (GET_CODE (base) == REG
2228 && qty_const != 0
2229 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (base))
2230 && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]] == GET_MODE (base)
2231 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]] != 0)
2232 base = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]];
2233 else if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
2234 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT
2235 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 0)) == REG
2236 && qty_const != 0
2237 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (base, 0)))
2238 && (qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]]
2239 == GET_MODE (XEXP (base, 0)))
2240 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]])
2241 {
2242 start = INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
2243 base = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]];
2244 }
2245
2246 /* By definition, operand1 of a LO_SUM is the associated constant
2247 address. Use the associated constant address as the base instead. */
2248 if (GET_CODE (base) == LO_SUM)
2249 base = XEXP (base, 1);
2250
2251 /* Strip off CONST. */
2252 if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST)
2253 base = XEXP (base, 0);
2254
2255 if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
2256 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT)
2257 {
2258 start += INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
2259 base = XEXP (base, 0);
2260 }
2261
2262 end = start + size;
2263
2264 /* Set the return values. */
2265 *pbase = base;
2266 *pstart = start;
2267 *pend = end;
2268 }
2269
2270 /* Return 1 iff any subexpression of X refers to memory
2271 at an address of BASE plus some offset
2272 such that any of the bytes' offsets fall between START (inclusive)
2273 and END (exclusive).
2274
2275 The value is undefined if X is a varying address (as determined by
2276 cse_rtx_addr_varies_p). This function is not used in such cases.
2277
2278 When used in the cse pass, `qty_const' is nonzero, and it is used
2279 to treat an address that is a register with a known constant value
2280 as if it were that constant value.
2281 In the loop pass, `qty_const' is zero, so this is not done. */
2282
2283 static int
2284 refers_to_mem_p (x, base, start, end)
2285 rtx x, base;
2286 HOST_WIDE_INT start, end;
2287 {
2288 register HOST_WIDE_INT i;
2289 register enum rtx_code code;
2290 register char *fmt;
2291
2292 if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST_INT)
2293 {
2294 start += INTVAL (base);
2295 end += INTVAL (base);
2296 base = const0_rtx;
2297 }
2298
2299 repeat:
2300 if (x == 0)
2301 return 0;
2302
2303 code = GET_CODE (x);
2304 if (code == MEM)
2305 {
2306 register rtx addr = XEXP (x, 0); /* Get the address. */
2307 rtx mybase;
2308 HOST_WIDE_INT mystart, myend;
2309
2310 set_nonvarying_address_components (addr, GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)),
2311 &mybase, &mystart, &myend);
2312
2313
2314 /* refers_to_mem_p is never called with varying addresses.
2315 If the base addresses are not equal, there is no chance
2316 of the memory addresses conflicting. */
2317 if (! rtx_equal_p (mybase, base))
2318 return 0;
2319
2320 return myend > start && mystart < end;
2321 }
2322
2323 /* X does not match, so try its subexpressions. */
2324
2325 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2326 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2327 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2328 {
2329 if (i == 0)
2330 {
2331 x = XEXP (x, 0);
2332 goto repeat;
2333 }
2334 else
2335 if (refers_to_mem_p (XEXP (x, i), base, start, end))
2336 return 1;
2337 }
2338 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2339 {
2340 int j;
2341 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2342 if (refers_to_mem_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), base, start, end))
2343 return 1;
2344 }
2345
2346 return 0;
2347 }
2348
2349 /* Nonzero if X refers to memory at a varying address;
2350 except that a register which has at the moment a known constant value
2351 isn't considered variable. */
2352
2353 static int
2354 cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (x)
2355 rtx x;
2356 {
2357 /* We need not check for X and the equivalence class being of the same
2358 mode because if X is equivalent to a constant in some mode, it
2359 doesn't vary in any mode. */
2360
2361 if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
2362 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
2363 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)))
2364 && GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))]]
2365 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))]] != 0)
2366 return 0;
2367
2368 if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
2369 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
2370 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT
2371 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == REG
2372 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)))
2373 && (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))
2374 == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))]])
2375 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))]])
2376 return 0;
2377
2378 return rtx_addr_varies_p (x);
2379 }
2380 \f
2381 /* Canonicalize an expression:
2382 replace each register reference inside it
2383 with the "oldest" equivalent register.
2384
2385 If INSN is non-zero and we are replacing a pseudo with a hard register
2386 or vice versa, validate_change is used to ensure that INSN remains valid
2387 after we make our substitution. The calls are made with IN_GROUP non-zero
2388 so apply_change_group must be called upon the outermost return from this
2389 function (unless INSN is zero). The result of apply_change_group can
2390 generally be discarded since the changes we are making are optional. */
2391
2392 static rtx
2393 canon_reg (x, insn)
2394 rtx x;
2395 rtx insn;
2396 {
2397 register int i;
2398 register enum rtx_code code;
2399 register char *fmt;
2400
2401 if (x == 0)
2402 return x;
2403
2404 code = GET_CODE (x);
2405 switch (code)
2406 {
2407 case PC:
2408 case CC0:
2409 case CONST:
2410 case CONST_INT:
2411 case CONST_DOUBLE:
2412 case SYMBOL_REF:
2413 case LABEL_REF:
2414 case ADDR_VEC:
2415 case ADDR_DIFF_VEC:
2416 return x;
2417
2418 case REG:
2419 {
2420 register int first;
2421
2422 /* Never replace a hard reg, because hard regs can appear
2423 in more than one machine mode, and we must preserve the mode
2424 of each occurrence. Also, some hard regs appear in
2425 MEMs that are shared and mustn't be altered. Don't try to
2426 replace any reg that maps to a reg of class NO_REGS. */
2427 if (REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2428 || ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
2429 return x;
2430
2431 first = qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]];
2432 return (first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? regno_reg_rtx[first]
2433 : REGNO_REG_CLASS (first) == NO_REGS ? x
2434 : gen_rtx (REG, qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]], first));
2435 }
2436 }
2437
2438 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2439 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2440 {
2441 register int j;
2442
2443 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2444 {
2445 rtx new = canon_reg (XEXP (x, i), insn);
2446
2447 /* If replacing pseudo with hard reg or vice versa, ensure the
2448 insn remains valid. Likewise if the insn has MATCH_DUPs. */
2449 if (insn != 0 && new != 0
2450 && GET_CODE (new) == REG && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, i)) == REG
2451 && (((REGNO (new) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2452 != (REGNO (XEXP (x, i)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
2453 || insn_n_dups[recog_memoized (insn)] > 0))
2454 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), new, 1);
2455 else
2456 XEXP (x, i) = new;
2457 }
2458 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2459 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2460 XVECEXP (x, i, j) = canon_reg (XVECEXP (x, i, j), insn);
2461 }
2462
2463 return x;
2464 }
2465 \f
2466 /* LOC is a location with INSN that is an operand address (the contents of
2467 a MEM). Find the best equivalent address to use that is valid for this
2468 insn.
2469
2470 On most CISC machines, complicated address modes are costly, and rtx_cost
2471 is a good approximation for that cost. However, most RISC machines have
2472 only a few (usually only one) memory reference formats. If an address is
2473 valid at all, it is often just as cheap as any other address. Hence, for
2474 RISC machines, we use the configuration macro `ADDRESS_COST' to compare the
2475 costs of various addresses. For two addresses of equal cost, choose the one
2476 with the highest `rtx_cost' value as that has the potential of eliminating
2477 the most insns. For equal costs, we choose the first in the equivalence
2478 class. Note that we ignore the fact that pseudo registers are cheaper
2479 than hard registers here because we would also prefer the pseudo registers.
2480 */
2481
2482 static void
2483 find_best_addr (insn, loc)
2484 rtx insn;
2485 rtx *loc;
2486 {
2487 struct table_elt *elt, *p;
2488 rtx addr = *loc;
2489 int our_cost;
2490 int found_better = 1;
2491 int save_do_not_record = do_not_record;
2492 int save_hash_arg_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
2493 int save_hash_arg_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
2494 int hash_code;
2495 int addr_volatile;
2496 int regno;
2497
2498 /* Do not try to replace constant addresses or addresses of local and
2499 argument slots. These MEM expressions are made only once and inserted
2500 in many instructions, as well as being used to control symbol table
2501 output. It is not safe to clobber them.
2502
2503 There are some uncommon cases where the address is already in a register
2504 for some reason, but we cannot take advantage of that because we have
2505 no easy way to unshare the MEM. In addition, looking up all stack
2506 addresses is costly. */
2507 if ((GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS
2508 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG
2509 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT
2510 && (regno = REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0)),
2511 regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM))
2512 || (GET_CODE (addr) == REG
2513 && (regno = REGNO (addr),
2514 regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM))
2515 || CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (addr))
2516 return;
2517
2518 /* If this address is not simply a register, try to fold it. This will
2519 sometimes simplify the expression. Many simplifications
2520 will not be valid, but some, usually applying the associative rule, will
2521 be valid and produce better code. */
2522 if (GET_CODE (addr) != REG
2523 && validate_change (insn, loc, fold_rtx (addr, insn), 0))
2524 addr = *loc;
2525
2526 /* If this address is not in the hash table, we can't look for equivalences
2527 of the whole address. Also, ignore if volatile. */
2528
2529 do_not_record = 0;
2530 hash_code = HASH (addr, Pmode);
2531 addr_volatile = do_not_record;
2532 do_not_record = save_do_not_record;
2533 hash_arg_in_memory = save_hash_arg_in_memory;
2534 hash_arg_in_struct = save_hash_arg_in_struct;
2535
2536 if (addr_volatile)
2537 return;
2538
2539 elt = lookup (addr, hash_code, Pmode);
2540
2541 #ifndef ADDRESS_COST
2542 if (elt)
2543 {
2544 our_cost = elt->cost;
2545
2546 /* Find the lowest cost below ours that works. */
2547 for (elt = elt->first_same_value; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
2548 if (elt->cost < our_cost
2549 && (GET_CODE (elt->exp) == REG
2550 || exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
2551 && validate_change (insn, loc,
2552 canon_reg (copy_rtx (elt->exp), NULL_RTX), 0))
2553 return;
2554 }
2555 #else
2556
2557 if (elt)
2558 {
2559 /* We need to find the best (under the criteria documented above) entry
2560 in the class that is valid. We use the `flag' field to indicate
2561 choices that were invalid and iterate until we can't find a better
2562 one that hasn't already been tried. */
2563
2564 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2565 p->flag = 0;
2566
2567 while (found_better)
2568 {
2569 int best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (*loc);
2570 int best_rtx_cost = (elt->cost + 1) >> 1;
2571 struct table_elt *best_elt = elt;
2572
2573 found_better = 0;
2574 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2575 if (! p->flag
2576 && (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
2577 || exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
2578 && (ADDRESS_COST (p->exp) < best_addr_cost
2579 || (ADDRESS_COST (p->exp) == best_addr_cost
2580 && (p->cost + 1) >> 1 > best_rtx_cost)))
2581 {
2582 found_better = 1;
2583 best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (p->exp);
2584 best_rtx_cost = (p->cost + 1) >> 1;
2585 best_elt = p;
2586 }
2587
2588 if (found_better)
2589 {
2590 if (validate_change (insn, loc,
2591 canon_reg (copy_rtx (best_elt->exp),
2592 NULL_RTX), 0))
2593 return;
2594 else
2595 best_elt->flag = 1;
2596 }
2597 }
2598 }
2599
2600 /* If the address is a binary operation with the first operand a register
2601 and the second a constant, do the same as above, but looking for
2602 equivalences of the register. Then try to simplify before checking for
2603 the best address to use. This catches a few cases: First is when we
2604 have REG+const and the register is another REG+const. We can often merge
2605 the constants and eliminate one insn and one register. It may also be
2606 that a machine has a cheap REG+REG+const. Finally, this improves the
2607 code on the Alpha for unaligned byte stores. */
2608
2609 if (flag_expensive_optimizations
2610 && (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (*loc)) == '2'
2611 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (*loc)) == 'c')
2612 && GET_CODE (XEXP (*loc, 0)) == REG
2613 && GET_CODE (XEXP (*loc, 1)) == CONST_INT)
2614 {
2615 rtx c = XEXP (*loc, 1);
2616
2617 do_not_record = 0;
2618 hash_code = HASH (XEXP (*loc, 0), Pmode);
2619 do_not_record = save_do_not_record;
2620 hash_arg_in_memory = save_hash_arg_in_memory;
2621 hash_arg_in_struct = save_hash_arg_in_struct;
2622
2623 elt = lookup (XEXP (*loc, 0), hash_code, Pmode);
2624 if (elt == 0)
2625 return;
2626
2627 /* We need to find the best (under the criteria documented above) entry
2628 in the class that is valid. We use the `flag' field to indicate
2629 choices that were invalid and iterate until we can't find a better
2630 one that hasn't already been tried. */
2631
2632 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2633 p->flag = 0;
2634
2635 while (found_better)
2636 {
2637 int best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (*loc);
2638 int best_rtx_cost = (COST (*loc) + 1) >> 1;
2639 struct table_elt *best_elt = elt;
2640 rtx best_rtx = *loc;
2641
2642 found_better = 0;
2643 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2644 if (! p->flag
2645 && (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
2646 || exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0)))
2647 {
2648 rtx new = cse_gen_binary (GET_CODE (*loc), Pmode, p->exp, c);
2649
2650 if ((ADDRESS_COST (new) < best_addr_cost
2651 || (ADDRESS_COST (new) == best_addr_cost
2652 && (COST (new) + 1) >> 1 > best_rtx_cost)))
2653 {
2654 found_better = 1;
2655 best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (new);
2656 best_rtx_cost = (COST (new) + 1) >> 1;
2657 best_elt = p;
2658 best_rtx = new;
2659 }
2660 }
2661
2662 if (found_better)
2663 {
2664 if (validate_change (insn, loc,
2665 canon_reg (copy_rtx (best_rtx),
2666 NULL_RTX), 0))
2667 return;
2668 else
2669 best_elt->flag = 1;
2670 }
2671 }
2672 }
2673 #endif
2674 }
2675 \f
2676 /* Given an operation (CODE, *PARG1, *PARG2), where code is a comparison
2677 operation (EQ, NE, GT, etc.), follow it back through the hash table and
2678 what values are being compared.
2679
2680 *PARG1 and *PARG2 are updated to contain the rtx representing the values
2681 actually being compared. For example, if *PARG1 was (cc0) and *PARG2
2682 was (const_int 0), *PARG1 and *PARG2 will be set to the objects that were
2683 compared to produce cc0.
2684
2685 The return value is the comparison operator and is either the code of
2686 A or the code corresponding to the inverse of the comparison. */
2687
2688 static enum rtx_code
2689 find_comparison_args (code, parg1, parg2, pmode1, pmode2)
2690 enum rtx_code code;
2691 rtx *parg1, *parg2;
2692 enum machine_mode *pmode1, *pmode2;
2693 {
2694 rtx arg1, arg2;
2695
2696 arg1 = *parg1, arg2 = *parg2;
2697
2698 /* If ARG2 is const0_rtx, see what ARG1 is equivalent to. */
2699
2700 while (arg2 == CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (arg1)))
2701 {
2702 /* Set non-zero when we find something of interest. */
2703 rtx x = 0;
2704 int reverse_code = 0;
2705 struct table_elt *p = 0;
2706
2707 /* If arg1 is a COMPARE, extract the comparison arguments from it.
2708 On machines with CC0, this is the only case that can occur, since
2709 fold_rtx will return the COMPARE or item being compared with zero
2710 when given CC0. */
2711
2712 if (GET_CODE (arg1) == COMPARE && arg2 == const0_rtx)
2713 x = arg1;
2714
2715 /* If ARG1 is a comparison operator and CODE is testing for
2716 STORE_FLAG_VALUE, get the inner arguments. */
2717
2718 else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (arg1)) == '<')
2719 {
2720 if (code == NE
2721 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_INT
2722 && code == LT && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
2723 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2724 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_FLOAT
2725 && FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE < 0)
2726 #endif
2727 )
2728 x = arg1;
2729 else if (code == EQ
2730 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_INT
2731 && code == GE && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
2732 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2733 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_FLOAT
2734 && FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE < 0)
2735 #endif
2736 )
2737 x = arg1, reverse_code = 1;
2738 }
2739
2740 /* ??? We could also check for
2741
2742 (ne (and (eq (...) (const_int 1))) (const_int 0))
2743
2744 and related forms, but let's wait until we see them occurring. */
2745
2746 if (x == 0)
2747 /* Look up ARG1 in the hash table and see if it has an equivalence
2748 that lets us see what is being compared. */
2749 p = lookup (arg1, safe_hash (arg1, GET_MODE (arg1)) % NBUCKETS,
2750 GET_MODE (arg1));
2751 if (p) p = p->first_same_value;
2752
2753 for (; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2754 {
2755 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (p->exp);
2756
2757 /* If the entry isn't valid, skip it. */
2758 if (! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
2759 continue;
2760
2761 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == COMPARE
2762 /* Another possibility is that this machine has a compare insn
2763 that includes the comparison code. In that case, ARG1 would
2764 be equivalent to a comparison operation that would set ARG1 to
2765 either STORE_FLAG_VALUE or zero. If this is an NE operation,
2766 ORIG_CODE is the actual comparison being done; if it is an EQ,
2767 we must reverse ORIG_CODE. On machine with a negative value
2768 for STORE_FLAG_VALUE, also look at LT and GE operations. */
2769 || ((code == NE
2770 || (code == LT
2771 && GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_INT
2772 && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode)
2773 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
2774 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2775 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
2776 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) - 1))))
2777 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2778 || (code == LT
2779 && GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_FLOAT
2780 && FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE < 0)
2781 #endif
2782 )
2783 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p->exp)) == '<'))
2784 {
2785 x = p->exp;
2786 break;
2787 }
2788 else if ((code == EQ
2789 || (code == GE
2790 && GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_INT
2791 && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode)
2792 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
2793 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2794 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
2795 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) - 1))))
2796 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2797 || (code == GE
2798 && GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_FLOAT
2799 && FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE < 0)
2800 #endif
2801 )
2802 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p->exp)) == '<')
2803 {
2804 reverse_code = 1;
2805 x = p->exp;
2806 break;
2807 }
2808
2809 /* If this is fp + constant, the equivalent is a better operand since
2810 it may let us predict the value of the comparison. */
2811 else if (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (p->exp))
2812 {
2813 arg1 = p->exp;
2814 continue;
2815 }
2816 }
2817
2818 /* If we didn't find a useful equivalence for ARG1, we are done.
2819 Otherwise, set up for the next iteration. */
2820 if (x == 0)
2821 break;
2822
2823 arg1 = XEXP (x, 0), arg2 = XEXP (x, 1);
2824 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x)) == '<')
2825 code = GET_CODE (x);
2826
2827 if (reverse_code)
2828 code = reverse_condition (code);
2829 }
2830
2831 /* Return our results. Return the modes from before fold_rtx
2832 because fold_rtx might produce const_int, and then it's too late. */
2833 *pmode1 = GET_MODE (arg1), *pmode2 = GET_MODE (arg2);
2834 *parg1 = fold_rtx (arg1, 0), *parg2 = fold_rtx (arg2, 0);
2835
2836 return code;
2837 }
2838 \f
2839 /* Try to simplify a unary operation CODE whose output mode is to be
2840 MODE with input operand OP whose mode was originally OP_MODE.
2841 Return zero if no simplification can be made. */
2842
2843 rtx
2844 simplify_unary_operation (code, mode, op, op_mode)
2845 enum rtx_code code;
2846 enum machine_mode mode;
2847 rtx op;
2848 enum machine_mode op_mode;
2849 {
2850 register int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
2851
2852 /* The order of these tests is critical so that, for example, we don't
2853 check the wrong mode (input vs. output) for a conversion operation,
2854 such as FIX. At some point, this should be simplified. */
2855
2856 #if !defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
2857 if (code == FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT)
2858 {
2859 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2860
2861 #ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2862 REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, INTVAL (op), INTVAL (op) < 0 ? ~0 : 0);
2863 #else
2864 d = (double) INTVAL (op);
2865 #endif
2866 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2867 }
2868 else if (code == UNSIGNED_FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT)
2869 {
2870 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2871
2872 #ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2873 REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, INTVAL (op), 0);
2874 #else
2875 d = (double) (unsigned int) INTVAL (op);
2876 #endif
2877 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2878 }
2879
2880 else if (code == FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
2881 && GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
2882 {
2883 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2884
2885 #ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2886 REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op), CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op));
2887 #else
2888 if (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) < 0)
2889 {
2890 d = (double) (~ CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op));
2891 d *= ((double) ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT / 2))
2892 * (double) ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT / 2)));
2893 d += (double) (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (~ CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op));
2894 d = (- d - 1.0);
2895 }
2896 else
2897 {
2898 d = (double) CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
2899 d *= ((double) ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT / 2))
2900 * (double) ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT / 2)));
2901 d += (double) (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op);
2902 }
2903 #endif /* REAL_ARITHMETIC */
2904 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2905 }
2906 else if (code == UNSIGNED_FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
2907 && GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
2908 {
2909 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2910
2911 #ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2912 REAL_VALUE_FROM_UNSIGNED_INT (d, CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op),
2913 CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op));
2914 #else
2915 d = (double) CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
2916 d *= ((double) ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT / 2))
2917 * (double) ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT / 2)));
2918 d += (double) (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op);
2919 #endif /* REAL_ARITHMETIC */
2920 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2921 }
2922 #endif
2923
2924 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
2925 && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT && width > 0)
2926 {
2927 register HOST_WIDE_INT arg0 = INTVAL (op);
2928 register HOST_WIDE_INT val;
2929
2930 switch (code)
2931 {
2932 case NOT:
2933 val = ~ arg0;
2934 break;
2935
2936 case NEG:
2937 val = - arg0;
2938 break;
2939
2940 case ABS:
2941 val = (arg0 >= 0 ? arg0 : - arg0);
2942 break;
2943
2944 case FFS:
2945 /* Don't use ffs here. Instead, get low order bit and then its
2946 number. If arg0 is zero, this will return 0, as desired. */
2947 arg0 &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
2948 val = exact_log2 (arg0 & (- arg0)) + 1;
2949 break;
2950
2951 case TRUNCATE:
2952 val = arg0;
2953 break;
2954
2955 case ZERO_EXTEND:
2956 if (op_mode == VOIDmode)
2957 op_mode = mode;
2958 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) == HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
2959 {
2960 /* If we were really extending the mode,
2961 we would have to distinguish between zero-extension
2962 and sign-extension. */
2963 if (width != GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode))
2964 abort ();
2965 val = arg0;
2966 }
2967 else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
2968 val = arg0 & ~((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode));
2969 else
2970 return 0;
2971 break;
2972
2973 case SIGN_EXTEND:
2974 if (op_mode == VOIDmode)
2975 op_mode = mode;
2976 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) == HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
2977 {
2978 /* If we were really extending the mode,
2979 we would have to distinguish between zero-extension
2980 and sign-extension. */
2981 if (width != GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode))
2982 abort ();
2983 val = arg0;
2984 }
2985 else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
2986 {
2987 val
2988 = arg0 & ~((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode));
2989 if (val
2990 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) - 1)))
2991 val -= (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode);
2992 }
2993 else
2994 return 0;
2995 break;
2996
2997 case SQRT:
2998 return 0;
2999
3000 default:
3001 abort ();
3002 }
3003
3004 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
3005 unless they and our sign bit are all one.
3006 So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
3007 unsigned value for this mode. */
3008 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
3009 && ((val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1)))
3010 != ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1))))
3011 val &= (1 << width) - 1;
3012
3013 return GEN_INT (val);
3014 }
3015
3016 /* We can do some operations on integer CONST_DOUBLEs. Also allow
3017 for a DImode operation on a CONST_INT. */
3018 else if (GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode
3019 && (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT))
3020 {
3021 HOST_WIDE_INT l1, h1, lv, hv;
3022
3023 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
3024 l1 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op), h1 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
3025 else
3026 l1 = INTVAL (op), h1 = l1 < 0 ? -1 : 0;
3027
3028 switch (code)
3029 {
3030 case NOT:
3031 lv = ~ l1;
3032 hv = ~ h1;
3033 break;
3034
3035 case NEG:
3036 neg_double (l1, h1, &lv, &hv);
3037 break;
3038
3039 case ABS:
3040 if (h1 < 0)
3041 neg_double (l1, h1, &lv, &hv);
3042 else
3043 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3044 break;
3045
3046 case FFS:
3047 hv = 0;
3048 if (l1 == 0)
3049 lv = HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT + exact_log2 (h1 & (-h1)) + 1;
3050 else
3051 lv = exact_log2 (l1 & (-l1)) + 1;
3052 break;
3053
3054 case TRUNCATE:
3055 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
3056 return GEN_INT (l1 & GET_MODE_MASK (mode));
3057 else
3058 return 0;
3059 break;
3060
3061 case ZERO_EXTEND:
3062 if (op_mode == VOIDmode
3063 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
3064 return 0;
3065
3066 hv = 0;
3067 lv = l1 & GET_MODE_MASK (op_mode);
3068 break;
3069
3070 case SIGN_EXTEND:
3071 if (op_mode == VOIDmode
3072 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
3073 return 0;
3074 else
3075 {
3076 lv = l1 & GET_MODE_MASK (op_mode);
3077 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
3078 && (lv & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
3079 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) - 1))) != 0)
3080 lv -= (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode);
3081
3082 hv = (lv < 0) ? ~ (HOST_WIDE_INT) 0 : 0;
3083 }
3084 break;
3085
3086 case SQRT:
3087 return 0;
3088
3089 default:
3090 return 0;
3091 }
3092
3093 return immed_double_const (lv, hv, mode);
3094 }
3095
3096 #if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
3097 else if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
3098 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
3099 {
3100 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
3101 jmp_buf handler;
3102 rtx x;
3103
3104 if (setjmp (handler))
3105 /* There used to be a warning here, but that is inadvisable.
3106 People may want to cause traps, and the natural way
3107 to do it should not get a warning. */
3108 return 0;
3109
3110 set_float_handler (handler);
3111
3112 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op);
3113
3114 switch (code)
3115 {
3116 case NEG:
3117 d = REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (d);
3118 break;
3119
3120 case ABS:
3121 if (REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (d))
3122 d = REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (d);
3123 break;
3124
3125 case FLOAT_TRUNCATE:
3126 d = real_value_truncate (mode, d);
3127 break;
3128
3129 case FLOAT_EXTEND:
3130 /* All this does is change the mode. */
3131 break;
3132
3133 case FIX:
3134 d = REAL_VALUE_RNDZINT (d);
3135 break;
3136
3137 case UNSIGNED_FIX:
3138 d = REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_RNDZINT (d);
3139 break;
3140
3141 case SQRT:
3142 return 0;
3143
3144 default:
3145 abort ();
3146 }
3147
3148 x = immed_real_const_1 (d, mode);
3149 set_float_handler (NULL_PTR);
3150 return x;
3151 }
3152 else if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
3153 && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT && width > 0)
3154 {
3155 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
3156 jmp_buf handler;
3157 rtx x;
3158 HOST_WIDE_INT val;
3159
3160 if (setjmp (handler))
3161 return 0;
3162
3163 set_float_handler (handler);
3164
3165 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op);
3166
3167 switch (code)
3168 {
3169 case FIX:
3170 val = REAL_VALUE_FIX (d);
3171 break;
3172
3173 case UNSIGNED_FIX:
3174 val = REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (d);
3175 break;
3176
3177 default:
3178 abort ();
3179 }
3180
3181 set_float_handler (NULL_PTR);
3182
3183 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
3184 unless they and our sign bit are all one.
3185 So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
3186 unsigned value for this mode. */
3187 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
3188 && ((val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1)))
3189 != ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1))))
3190 val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
3191
3192 return GEN_INT (val);
3193 }
3194 #endif
3195 /* This was formerly used only for non-IEEE float.
3196 eggert@twinsun.com says it is safe for IEEE also. */
3197 else
3198 {
3199 /* There are some simplifications we can do even if the operands
3200 aren't constant. */
3201 switch (code)
3202 {
3203 case NEG:
3204 case NOT:
3205 /* (not (not X)) == X, similarly for NEG. */
3206 if (GET_CODE (op) == code)
3207 return XEXP (op, 0);
3208 break;
3209
3210 case SIGN_EXTEND:
3211 /* (sign_extend (truncate (minus (label_ref L1) (label_ref L2))))
3212 becomes just the MINUS if its mode is MODE. This allows
3213 folding switch statements on machines using casesi (such as
3214 the Vax). */
3215 if (GET_CODE (op) == TRUNCATE
3216 && GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == mode
3217 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == MINUS
3218 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op, 0), 0)) == LABEL_REF
3219 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF)
3220 return XEXP (op, 0);
3221 break;
3222 }
3223
3224 return 0;
3225 }
3226 }
3227 \f
3228 /* Simplify a binary operation CODE with result mode MODE, operating on OP0
3229 and OP1. Return 0 if no simplification is possible.
3230
3231 Don't use this for relational operations such as EQ or LT.
3232 Use simplify_relational_operation instead. */
3233
3234 rtx
3235 simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, op0, op1)
3236 enum rtx_code code;
3237 enum machine_mode mode;
3238 rtx op0, op1;
3239 {
3240 register HOST_WIDE_INT arg0, arg1, arg0s, arg1s;
3241 HOST_WIDE_INT val;
3242 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
3243 rtx tem;
3244
3245 /* Relational operations don't work here. We must know the mode
3246 of the operands in order to do the comparison correctly.
3247 Assuming a full word can give incorrect results.
3248 Consider comparing 128 with -128 in QImode. */
3249
3250 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '<')
3251 abort ();
3252
3253 #if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
3254 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT
3255 && GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
3256 && mode == GET_MODE (op0) && mode == GET_MODE (op1))
3257 {
3258 REAL_VALUE_TYPE f0, f1, value;
3259 jmp_buf handler;
3260
3261 if (setjmp (handler))
3262 return 0;
3263
3264 set_float_handler (handler);
3265
3266 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (f0, op0);
3267 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (f1, op1);
3268 f0 = real_value_truncate (mode, f0);
3269 f1 = real_value_truncate (mode, f1);
3270
3271 #ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
3272 REAL_ARITHMETIC (value, rtx_to_tree_code (code), f0, f1);
3273 #else
3274 switch (code)
3275 {
3276 case PLUS:
3277 value = f0 + f1;
3278 break;
3279 case MINUS:
3280 value = f0 - f1;
3281 break;
3282 case MULT:
3283 value = f0 * f1;
3284 break;
3285 case DIV:
3286 #ifndef REAL_INFINITY
3287 if (f1 == 0)
3288 return 0;
3289 #endif
3290 value = f0 / f1;
3291 break;
3292 case SMIN:
3293 value = MIN (f0, f1);
3294 break;
3295 case SMAX:
3296 value = MAX (f0, f1);
3297 break;
3298 default:
3299 abort ();
3300 }
3301 #endif
3302
3303 set_float_handler (NULL_PTR);
3304 value = real_value_truncate (mode, value);
3305 return immed_real_const_1 (value, mode);
3306 }
3307 #endif /* not REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE, or REAL_ARITHMETIC */
3308
3309 /* We can fold some multi-word operations. */
3310 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
3311 && GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE
3312 && (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT))
3313 {
3314 HOST_WIDE_INT l1, l2, h1, h2, lv, hv;
3315
3316 l1 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op0), h1 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op0);
3317
3318 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE)
3319 l2 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op1), h2 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op1);
3320 else
3321 l2 = INTVAL (op1), h2 = l2 < 0 ? -1 : 0;
3322
3323 switch (code)
3324 {
3325 case MINUS:
3326 /* A - B == A + (-B). */
3327 neg_double (l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
3328 l2 = lv, h2 = hv;
3329
3330 /* .. fall through ... */
3331
3332 case PLUS:
3333 add_double (l1, h1, l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
3334 break;
3335
3336 case MULT:
3337 mul_double (l1, h1, l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
3338 break;
3339
3340 case DIV: case MOD: case UDIV: case UMOD:
3341 /* We'd need to include tree.h to do this and it doesn't seem worth
3342 it. */
3343 return 0;
3344
3345 case AND:
3346 lv = l1 & l2, hv = h1 & h2;
3347 break;
3348
3349 case IOR:
3350 lv = l1 | l2, hv = h1 | h2;
3351 break;
3352
3353 case XOR:
3354 lv = l1 ^ l2, hv = h1 ^ h2;
3355 break;
3356
3357 case SMIN:
3358 if (h1 < h2
3359 || (h1 == h2
3360 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l1
3361 < (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l2)))
3362 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3363 else
3364 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3365 break;
3366
3367 case SMAX:
3368 if (h1 > h2
3369 || (h1 == h2
3370 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l1
3371 > (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l2)))
3372 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3373 else
3374 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3375 break;
3376
3377 case UMIN:
3378 if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) h1 < (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) h2
3379 || (h1 == h2
3380 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l1
3381 < (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l2)))
3382 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3383 else
3384 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3385 break;
3386
3387 case UMAX:
3388 if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) h1 > (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) h2
3389 || (h1 == h2
3390 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l1
3391 > (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l2)))
3392 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3393 else
3394 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3395 break;
3396
3397 case LSHIFTRT: case ASHIFTRT:
3398 case ASHIFT: case LSHIFT:
3399 case ROTATE: case ROTATERT:
3400 #ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
3401 l2 &= (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1), h2 = 0;
3402 #endif
3403
3404 if (h2 != 0 || l2 < 0 || l2 >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
3405 return 0;
3406
3407 if (code == LSHIFTRT || code == ASHIFTRT)
3408 rshift_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv,
3409 code == ASHIFTRT);
3410 else if (code == ASHIFT || code == LSHIFT)
3411 lshift_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv,
3412 code == ASHIFT);
3413 else if (code == ROTATE)
3414 lrotate_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv);
3415 else /* code == ROTATERT */
3416 rrotate_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv);
3417 break;
3418
3419 default:
3420 return 0;
3421 }
3422
3423 return immed_double_const (lv, hv, mode);
3424 }
3425
3426 if (GET_CODE (op0) != CONST_INT || GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT
3427 || width > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT || width == 0)
3428 {
3429 /* Even if we can't compute a constant result,
3430 there are some cases worth simplifying. */
3431
3432 switch (code)
3433 {
3434 case PLUS:
3435 /* In IEEE floating point, x+0 is not the same as x. Similarly
3436 for the other optimizations below. */
3437 if (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT == IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3438 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
3439 break;
3440
3441 if (op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3442 return op0;
3443
3444 /* ((-a) + b) -> (b - a) and similarly for (a + (-b)) */
3445 if (GET_CODE (op0) == NEG)
3446 return cse_gen_binary (MINUS, mode, op1, XEXP (op0, 0));
3447 else if (GET_CODE (op1) == NEG)
3448 return cse_gen_binary (MINUS, mode, op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
3449
3450 /* Handle both-operands-constant cases. We can only add
3451 CONST_INTs to constants since the sum of relocatable symbols
3452 can't be handled by most assemblers. */
3453
3454 if (CONSTANT_P (op0) && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
3455 return plus_constant (op0, INTVAL (op1));
3456 else if (CONSTANT_P (op1) && GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
3457 return plus_constant (op1, INTVAL (op0));
3458
3459 /* If one of the operands is a PLUS or a MINUS, see if we can
3460 simplify this by the associative law.
3461 Don't use the associative law for floating point.
3462 The inaccuracy makes it nonassociative,
3463 and subtle programs can break if operations are associated. */
3464
3465 if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
3466 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT)
3467 && (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS || GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS
3468 || GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS || GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS)
3469 && (tem = simplify_plus_minus (code, mode, op0, op1)) != 0)
3470 return tem;
3471 break;
3472
3473 case COMPARE:
3474 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
3475 /* Convert (compare FOO (const_int 0)) to FOO unless we aren't
3476 using cc0, in which case we want to leave it as a COMPARE
3477 so we can distinguish it from a register-register-copy.
3478
3479 In IEEE floating point, x-0 is not the same as x. */
3480
3481 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3482 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
3483 && op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3484 return op0;
3485 #else
3486 /* Do nothing here. */
3487 #endif
3488 break;
3489
3490 case MINUS:
3491 /* None of these optimizations can be done for IEEE
3492 floating point. */
3493 if (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT == IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3494 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT
3495 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_PARTIAL_INT)
3496 break;
3497
3498 /* We can't assume x-x is 0 even with non-IEEE floating point. */
3499 if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1)
3500 && ! side_effects_p (op0)
3501 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_FLOAT
3502 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT)
3503 return const0_rtx;
3504
3505 /* Change subtraction from zero into negation. */
3506 if (op0 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3507 return gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op1);
3508
3509 /* (-1 - a) is ~a. */
3510 if (op0 == constm1_rtx)
3511 return gen_rtx (NOT, mode, op1);
3512
3513 /* Subtracting 0 has no effect. */
3514 if (op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3515 return op0;
3516
3517 /* (a - (-b)) -> (a + b). */
3518 if (GET_CODE (op1) == NEG)
3519 return cse_gen_binary (PLUS, mode, op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
3520
3521 /* If one of the operands is a PLUS or a MINUS, see if we can
3522 simplify this by the associative law.
3523 Don't use the associative law for floating point.
3524 The inaccuracy makes it nonassociative,
3525 and subtle programs can break if operations are associated. */
3526
3527 if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
3528 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT)
3529 && (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS || GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS
3530 || GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS || GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS)
3531 && (tem = simplify_plus_minus (code, mode, op0, op1)) != 0)
3532 return tem;
3533
3534 /* Don't let a relocatable value get a negative coeff. */
3535 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
3536 return plus_constant (op0, - INTVAL (op1));
3537 break;
3538
3539 case MULT:
3540 if (op1 == constm1_rtx)
3541 {
3542 tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, op0, mode);
3543
3544 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op0);
3545 }
3546
3547 /* In IEEE floating point, x*0 is not always 0. */
3548 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3549 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
3550 && op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode)
3551 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3552 return op1;
3553
3554 /* In IEEE floating point, x*1 is not equivalent to x for nans.
3555 However, ANSI says we can drop signals,
3556 so we can do this anyway. */
3557 if (op1 == CONST1_RTX (mode))
3558 return op0;
3559
3560 /* Convert multiply by constant power of two into shift. */
3561 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3562 && (val = exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1))) >= 0)
3563 return gen_rtx (ASHIFT, mode, op0, GEN_INT (val));
3564
3565 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
3566 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op1)) == MODE_FLOAT)
3567 {
3568 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
3569 jmp_buf handler;
3570 int op1is2, op1ism1;
3571
3572 if (setjmp (handler))
3573 return 0;
3574
3575 set_float_handler (handler);
3576 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op1);
3577 op1is2 = REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconst2);
3578 op1ism1 = REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconstm1);
3579 set_float_handler (NULL_PTR);
3580
3581 /* x*2 is x+x and x*(-1) is -x */
3582 if (op1is2 && GET_MODE (op0) == mode)
3583 return gen_rtx (PLUS, mode, op0, copy_rtx (op0));
3584
3585 else if (op1ism1 && GET_MODE (op0) == mode)
3586 return gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op0);
3587 }
3588 break;
3589
3590 case IOR:
3591 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
3592 return op0;
3593 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3594 && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
3595 return op1;
3596 if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3597 return op0;
3598 /* A | (~A) -> -1 */
3599 if (((GET_CODE (op0) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 0), op1))
3600 || (GET_CODE (op1) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 0), op0)))
3601 && ! side_effects_p (op0)
3602 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC)
3603 return constm1_rtx;
3604 break;
3605
3606 case XOR:
3607 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
3608 return op0;
3609 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3610 && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
3611 return gen_rtx (NOT, mode, op0);
3612 if (op0 == op1 && ! side_effects_p (op0)
3613 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC)
3614 return const0_rtx;
3615 break;
3616
3617 case AND:
3618 if (op1 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3619 return const0_rtx;
3620 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3621 && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
3622 return op0;
3623 if (op0 == op1 && ! side_effects_p (op0)
3624 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC)
3625 return op0;
3626 /* A & (~A) -> 0 */
3627 if (((GET_CODE (op0) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 0), op1))
3628 || (GET_CODE (op1) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 0), op0)))
3629 && ! side_effects_p (op0)
3630 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC)
3631 return const0_rtx;
3632 break;
3633
3634 case UDIV:
3635 /* Convert divide by power of two into shift (divide by 1 handled
3636 below). */
3637 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3638 && (arg1 = exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1))) > 0)
3639 return gen_rtx (LSHIFTRT, mode, op0, GEN_INT (arg1));
3640
3641 /* ... fall through ... */
3642
3643 case DIV:
3644 if (op1 == CONST1_RTX (mode))
3645 return op0;
3646
3647 /* In IEEE floating point, 0/x is not always 0. */
3648 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3649 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
3650 && op0 == CONST0_RTX (mode)
3651 && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3652 return op0;
3653
3654 #if 0 /* Turned off till an expert says this is a safe thing to do. */
3655 #if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
3656 /* Change division by a constant into multiplication. */
3657 else if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
3658 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op1)) == MODE_FLOAT
3659 && op1 != CONST0_RTX (mode))
3660 {
3661 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
3662 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op1);
3663 if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconst0))
3664 abort();
3665 #if defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
3666 REAL_ARITHMETIC (d, (int) RDIV_EXPR, dconst1, d);
3667 return gen_rtx (MULT, mode, op0,
3668 CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode));
3669 #else
3670 return gen_rtx (MULT, mode, op0,
3671 CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (1./d, mode));
3672 }
3673 #endif
3674 #endif
3675 #endif
3676 break;
3677
3678 case UMOD:
3679 /* Handle modulus by power of two (mod with 1 handled below). */
3680 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3681 && exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1)) > 0)
3682 return gen_rtx (AND, mode, op0, GEN_INT (INTVAL (op1) - 1));
3683
3684 /* ... fall through ... */
3685
3686 case MOD:
3687 if ((op0 == const0_rtx || op1 == const1_rtx)
3688 && ! side_effects_p (op0) && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3689 return const0_rtx;
3690 break;
3691
3692 case ROTATERT:
3693 case ROTATE:
3694 /* Rotating ~0 always results in ~0. */
3695 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
3696 && INTVAL (op0) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
3697 && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3698 return op0;
3699
3700 /* ... fall through ... */
3701
3702 case LSHIFT:
3703 case ASHIFT:
3704 case ASHIFTRT:
3705 case LSHIFTRT:
3706 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
3707 return op0;
3708 if (op0 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3709 return op0;
3710 break;
3711
3712 case SMIN:
3713 if (width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3714 && INTVAL (op1) == (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width -1)
3715 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3716 return op1;
3717 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3718 return op0;
3719 break;
3720
3721 case SMAX:
3722 if (width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3723 && (INTVAL (op1)
3724 == (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_MASK (mode) >> 1)
3725 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3726 return op1;
3727 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3728 return op0;
3729 break;
3730
3731 case UMIN:
3732 if (op1 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3733 return op1;
3734 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3735 return op0;
3736 break;
3737
3738 case UMAX:
3739 if (op1 == constm1_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3740 return op1;
3741 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3742 return op0;
3743 break;
3744
3745 default:
3746 abort ();
3747 }
3748
3749 return 0;
3750 }
3751
3752 /* Get the integer argument values in two forms:
3753 zero-extended in ARG0, ARG1 and sign-extended in ARG0S, ARG1S. */
3754
3755 arg0 = INTVAL (op0);
3756 arg1 = INTVAL (op1);
3757
3758 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
3759 {
3760 arg0 &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
3761 arg1 &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
3762
3763 arg0s = arg0;
3764 if (arg0s & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width - 1)))
3765 arg0s |= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << width);
3766
3767 arg1s = arg1;
3768 if (arg1s & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width - 1)))
3769 arg1s |= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << width);
3770 }
3771 else
3772 {
3773 arg0s = arg0;
3774 arg1s = arg1;
3775 }
3776
3777 /* Compute the value of the arithmetic. */
3778
3779 switch (code)
3780 {
3781 case PLUS:
3782 val = arg0s + arg1s;
3783 break;
3784
3785 case MINUS:
3786 val = arg0s - arg1s;
3787 break;
3788
3789 case MULT:
3790 val = arg0s * arg1s;
3791 break;
3792
3793 case DIV:
3794 if (arg1s == 0)
3795 return 0;
3796 val = arg0s / arg1s;
3797 break;
3798
3799 case MOD:
3800 if (arg1s == 0)
3801 return 0;
3802 val = arg0s % arg1s;
3803 break;
3804
3805 case UDIV:
3806 if (arg1 == 0)
3807 return 0;
3808 val = (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0 / arg1;
3809 break;
3810
3811 case UMOD:
3812 if (arg1 == 0)
3813 return 0;
3814 val = (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0 % arg1;
3815 break;
3816
3817 case AND:
3818 val = arg0 & arg1;
3819 break;
3820
3821 case IOR:
3822 val = arg0 | arg1;
3823 break;
3824
3825 case XOR:
3826 val = arg0 ^ arg1;
3827 break;
3828
3829 case LSHIFTRT:
3830 /* If shift count is undefined, don't fold it; let the machine do
3831 what it wants. But truncate it if the machine will do that. */
3832 if (arg1 < 0)
3833 return 0;
3834
3835 #ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
3836 arg1 &= (BITS_PER_WORD - 1);
3837 #endif
3838
3839 if (arg1 >= width)
3840 return 0;
3841
3842 val = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0) >> arg1;
3843 break;
3844
3845 case ASHIFT:
3846 case LSHIFT:
3847 if (arg1 < 0)
3848 return 0;
3849
3850 #ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
3851 arg1 &= (BITS_PER_WORD - 1);
3852 #endif
3853
3854 if (arg1 >= width)
3855 return 0;
3856
3857 val = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0) << arg1;
3858 break;
3859
3860 case ASHIFTRT:
3861 if (arg1 < 0)
3862 return 0;
3863
3864 #ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
3865 arg1 &= (BITS_PER_WORD - 1);
3866 #endif
3867
3868 if (arg1 >= width)
3869 return 0;
3870
3871 val = arg0s >> arg1;
3872
3873 /* Bootstrap compiler may not have sign extended the right shift.
3874 Manually extend the sign to insure bootstrap cc matches gcc. */
3875 if (arg0s < 0 && arg1 > 0)
3876 val |= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) -1) << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT - arg1);
3877
3878 break;
3879
3880 case ROTATERT:
3881 if (arg1 < 0)
3882 return 0;
3883
3884 arg1 %= width;
3885 val = ((((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0) << (width - arg1))
3886 | (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0) >> arg1));
3887 break;
3888
3889 case ROTATE:
3890 if (arg1 < 0)
3891 return 0;
3892
3893 arg1 %= width;
3894 val = ((((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0) << arg1)
3895 | (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0) >> (width - arg1)));
3896 break;
3897
3898 case COMPARE:
3899 /* Do nothing here. */
3900 return 0;
3901
3902 case SMIN:
3903 val = arg0s <= arg1s ? arg0s : arg1s;
3904 break;
3905
3906 case UMIN:
3907 val = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0
3908 <= (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg1 ? arg0 : arg1);
3909 break;
3910
3911 case SMAX:
3912 val = arg0s > arg1s ? arg0s : arg1s;
3913 break;
3914
3915 case UMAX:
3916 val = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0
3917 > (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg1 ? arg0 : arg1);
3918 break;
3919
3920 default:
3921 abort ();
3922 }
3923
3924 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode, unless they and our sign
3925 bit are all one. So we get either a reasonable negative value or a
3926 reasonable unsigned value for this mode. */
3927 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
3928 && ((val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1)))
3929 != ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1))))
3930 val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
3931
3932 return GEN_INT (val);
3933 }
3934 \f
3935 /* Simplify a PLUS or MINUS, at least one of whose operands may be another
3936 PLUS or MINUS.
3937
3938 Rather than test for specific case, we do this by a brute-force method
3939 and do all possible simplifications until no more changes occur. Then
3940 we rebuild the operation. */
3941
3942 static rtx
3943 simplify_plus_minus (code, mode, op0, op1)
3944 enum rtx_code code;
3945 enum machine_mode mode;
3946 rtx op0, op1;
3947 {
3948 rtx ops[8];
3949 int negs[8];
3950 rtx result, tem;
3951 int n_ops = 2, input_ops = 2, input_consts = 0, n_consts = 0;
3952 int first = 1, negate = 0, changed;
3953 int i, j;
3954
3955 bzero (ops, sizeof ops);
3956
3957 /* Set up the two operands and then expand them until nothing has been
3958 changed. If we run out of room in our array, give up; this should
3959 almost never happen. */
3960
3961 ops[0] = op0, ops[1] = op1, negs[0] = 0, negs[1] = (code == MINUS);
3962
3963 changed = 1;
3964 while (changed)
3965 {
3966 changed = 0;
3967
3968 for (i = 0; i < n_ops; i++)
3969 switch (GET_CODE (ops[i]))
3970 {
3971 case PLUS:
3972 case MINUS:
3973 if (n_ops == 7)
3974 return 0;
3975
3976 ops[n_ops] = XEXP (ops[i], 1);
3977 negs[n_ops++] = GET_CODE (ops[i]) == MINUS ? !negs[i] : negs[i];
3978 ops[i] = XEXP (ops[i], 0);
3979 input_ops++;
3980 changed = 1;
3981 break;
3982
3983 case NEG:
3984 ops[i] = XEXP (ops[i], 0);
3985 negs[i] = ! negs[i];
3986 changed = 1;
3987 break;
3988
3989 case CONST:
3990 ops[i] = XEXP (ops[i], 0);
3991 input_consts++;
3992 changed = 1;
3993 break;
3994
3995 case NOT:
3996 /* ~a -> (-a - 1) */
3997 if (n_ops != 7)
3998 {
3999 ops[n_ops] = constm1_rtx;
4000 negs[n_ops++] = negs[i];
4001 ops[i] = XEXP (ops[i], 0);
4002 negs[i] = ! negs[i];
4003 changed = 1;
4004 }
4005 break;
4006
4007 case CONST_INT:
4008 if (negs[i])
4009 ops[i] = GEN_INT (- INTVAL (ops[i])), negs[i] = 0, changed = 1;
4010 break;
4011 }
4012 }
4013
4014 /* If we only have two operands, we can't do anything. */
4015 if (n_ops <= 2)
4016 return 0;
4017
4018 /* Now simplify each pair of operands until nothing changes. The first
4019 time through just simplify constants against each other. */
4020
4021 changed = 1;
4022 while (changed)
4023 {
4024 changed = first;
4025
4026 for (i = 0; i < n_ops - 1; i++)
4027 for (j = i + 1; j < n_ops; j++)
4028 if (ops[i] != 0 && ops[j] != 0
4029 && (! first || (CONSTANT_P (ops[i]) && CONSTANT_P (ops[j]))))
4030 {
4031 rtx lhs = ops[i], rhs = ops[j];
4032 enum rtx_code ncode = PLUS;
4033
4034 if (negs[i] && ! negs[j])
4035 lhs = ops[j], rhs = ops[i], ncode = MINUS;
4036 else if (! negs[i] && negs[j])
4037 ncode = MINUS;
4038
4039 tem = simplify_binary_operation (ncode, mode, lhs, rhs);
4040 if (tem)
4041 {
4042 ops[i] = tem, ops[j] = 0;
4043 negs[i] = negs[i] && negs[j];
4044 if (GET_CODE (tem) == NEG)
4045 ops[i] = XEXP (tem, 0), negs[i] = ! negs[i];
4046
4047 if (GET_CODE (ops[i]) == CONST_INT && negs[i])
4048 ops[i] = GEN_INT (- INTVAL (ops[i])), negs[i] = 0;
4049 changed = 1;
4050 }
4051 }
4052
4053 first = 0;
4054 }
4055
4056 /* Pack all the operands to the lower-numbered entries and give up if
4057 we didn't reduce the number of operands we had. Make sure we
4058 count a CONST as two operands. If we have the same number of
4059 operands, but have made more CONSTs than we had, this is also
4060 an improvement, so accept it. */
4061
4062 for (i = 0, j = 0; j < n_ops; j++)
4063 if (ops[j] != 0)
4064 {
4065 ops[i] = ops[j], negs[i++] = negs[j];
4066 if (GET_CODE (ops[j]) == CONST)
4067 n_consts++;
4068 }
4069
4070 if (i + n_consts > input_ops
4071 || (i + n_consts == input_ops && n_consts <= input_consts))
4072 return 0;
4073
4074 n_ops = i;
4075
4076 /* If we have a CONST_INT, put it last. */
4077 for (i = 0; i < n_ops - 1; i++)
4078 if (GET_CODE (ops[i]) == CONST_INT)
4079 {
4080 tem = ops[n_ops - 1], ops[n_ops - 1] = ops[i] , ops[i] = tem;
4081 j = negs[n_ops - 1], negs[n_ops - 1] = negs[i], negs[i] = j;
4082 }
4083
4084 /* Put a non-negated operand first. If there aren't any, make all
4085 operands positive and negate the whole thing later. */
4086 for (i = 0; i < n_ops && negs[i]; i++)
4087 ;
4088
4089 if (i == n_ops)
4090 {
4091 for (i = 0; i < n_ops; i++)
4092 negs[i] = 0;
4093 negate = 1;
4094 }
4095 else if (i != 0)
4096 {
4097 tem = ops[0], ops[0] = ops[i], ops[i] = tem;
4098 j = negs[0], negs[0] = negs[i], negs[i] = j;
4099 }
4100
4101 /* Now make the result by performing the requested operations. */
4102 result = ops[0];
4103 for (i = 1; i < n_ops; i++)
4104 result = cse_gen_binary (negs[i] ? MINUS : PLUS, mode, result, ops[i]);
4105
4106 return negate ? gen_rtx (NEG, mode, result) : result;
4107 }
4108 \f
4109 /* Make a binary operation by properly ordering the operands and
4110 seeing if the expression folds. */
4111
4112 static rtx
4113 cse_gen_binary (code, mode, op0, op1)
4114 enum rtx_code code;
4115 enum machine_mode mode;
4116 rtx op0, op1;
4117 {
4118 rtx tem;
4119
4120 /* Put complex operands first and constants second if commutative. */
4121 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c'
4122 && ((CONSTANT_P (op0) && GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT)
4123 || (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (op0)) == 'o'
4124 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (op1)) != 'o')
4125 || (GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
4126 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))) == 'o'
4127 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (op1)) != 'o')))
4128 tem = op0, op0 = op1, op1 = tem;
4129
4130 /* If this simplifies, do it. */
4131 tem = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, op0, op1);
4132
4133 if (tem)
4134 return tem;
4135
4136 /* Handle addition and subtraction of CONST_INT specially. Otherwise,
4137 just form the operation. */
4138
4139 if (code == PLUS && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4140 && GET_MODE (op0) != VOIDmode)
4141 return plus_constant (op0, INTVAL (op1));
4142 else if (code == MINUS && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4143 && GET_MODE (op0) != VOIDmode)
4144 return plus_constant (op0, - INTVAL (op1));
4145 else
4146 return gen_rtx (code, mode, op0, op1);
4147 }
4148 \f
4149 /* Like simplify_binary_operation except used for relational operators.
4150 MODE is the mode of the operands, not that of the result. */
4151
4152 rtx
4153 simplify_relational_operation (code, mode, op0, op1)
4154 enum rtx_code code;
4155 enum machine_mode mode;
4156 rtx op0, op1;
4157 {
4158 register HOST_WIDE_INT arg0, arg1, arg0s, arg1s;
4159 HOST_WIDE_INT val;
4160 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
4161
4162 /* If op0 is a compare, extract the comparison arguments from it. */
4163 if (GET_CODE (op0) == COMPARE && op1 == const0_rtx)
4164 op1 = XEXP (op0, 1), op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
4165
4166 /* What to do with MODE_CC isn't clear yet.
4167 Let's make sure nothing erroneous is done. */
4168 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_CC)
4169 return 0;
4170
4171 /* Unlike the arithmetic operations, we can do the comparison whether
4172 or not WIDTH is larger than HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT because the
4173 CONST_INTs are to be understood as being infinite precision as
4174 is the comparison. So there is no question of overflow. */
4175
4176 if (GET_CODE (op0) != CONST_INT || GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT || width == 0)
4177 {
4178 /* Even if we can't compute a constant result,
4179 there are some cases worth simplifying. */
4180
4181 /* For non-IEEE floating-point, if the two operands are equal, we know
4182 the result. */
4183 if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1)
4184 && (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
4185 || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) != MODE_FLOAT))
4186 return (code == EQ || code == GE || code == LE || code == LEU
4187 || code == GEU) ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4188
4189 #if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
4190 else if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE
4191 && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
4192 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_FLOAT)
4193 {
4194 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d0, d1;
4195 jmp_buf handler;
4196 int op0lt, op1lt, equal;
4197
4198 if (setjmp (handler))
4199 return 0;
4200
4201 set_float_handler (handler);
4202 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d0, op0);
4203 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d1, op1);
4204 equal = REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d0, d1);
4205 op0lt = REAL_VALUES_LESS (d0, d1);
4206 op1lt = REAL_VALUES_LESS (d1, d0);
4207 set_float_handler (NULL_PTR);
4208
4209 switch (code)
4210 {
4211 case EQ:
4212 return equal ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4213 case NE:
4214 return !equal ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4215 case LE:
4216 return equal || op0lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4217 case LT:
4218 return op0lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4219 case GE:
4220 return equal || op1lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4221 case GT:
4222 return op1lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4223 }
4224 }
4225 #endif /* not REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE, or REAL_ARITHMETIC */
4226
4227 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
4228 && width > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
4229 && (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE
4230 || GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
4231 && (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
4232 || GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT))
4233 {
4234 HOST_WIDE_INT h0, l0, h1, l1;
4235 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT uh0, ul0, uh1, ul1;
4236 int op0lt, op0ltu, equal;
4237
4238 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE)
4239 l0 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op0), h0 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op0);
4240 else
4241 l0 = INTVAL (op0), h0 = l0 < 0 ? -1 : 0;
4242
4243 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE)
4244 l1 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op1), h1 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op1);
4245 else
4246 l1 = INTVAL (op1), h1 = l1 < 0 ? -1 : 0;
4247
4248 uh0 = h0, ul0 = l0, uh1 = h1, ul1 = l1;
4249
4250 equal = (h0 == h1 && l0 == l1);
4251 op0lt = (h0 < h1 || (h0 == h1 && l0 < l1));
4252 op0ltu = (uh0 < uh1 || (uh0 == uh1 && ul0 < ul1));
4253
4254 switch (code)
4255 {
4256 case EQ:
4257 return equal ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4258 case NE:
4259 return !equal ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4260 case LE:
4261 return equal || op0lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4262 case LT:
4263 return op0lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4264 case GE:
4265 return !op0lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4266 case GT:
4267 return !equal && !op0lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4268 case LEU:
4269 return equal || op0ltu ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4270 case LTU:
4271 return op0ltu ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4272 case GEU:
4273 return !op0ltu ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4274 case GTU:
4275 return !equal && !op0ltu ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4276 }
4277 }
4278
4279 switch (code)
4280 {
4281 case EQ:
4282 {
4283 #if 0
4284 /* We can't make this assumption due to #pragma weak */
4285 if (CONSTANT_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx)
4286 return const0_rtx;
4287 #endif
4288 if (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx
4289 /* On some machines, the ap reg can be 0 sometimes. */
4290 && op0 != arg_pointer_rtx)
4291 return const0_rtx;
4292 break;
4293 }
4294
4295 case NE:
4296 #if 0
4297 /* We can't make this assumption due to #pragma weak */
4298 if (CONSTANT_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx)
4299 return const_true_rtx;
4300 #endif
4301 if (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx
4302 /* On some machines, the ap reg can be 0 sometimes. */
4303 && op0 != arg_pointer_rtx)
4304 return const_true_rtx;
4305 break;
4306
4307 case GEU:
4308 /* Unsigned values are never negative, but we must be sure we are
4309 actually comparing a value, not a CC operand. */
4310 if (op1 == const0_rtx
4311 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
4312 return const_true_rtx;
4313 break;
4314
4315 case LTU:
4316 if (op1 == const0_rtx
4317 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
4318 return const0_rtx;
4319 break;
4320
4321 case LEU:
4322 /* Unsigned values are never greater than the largest
4323 unsigned value. */
4324 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4325 && INTVAL (op1) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
4326 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
4327 return const_true_rtx;
4328 break;
4329
4330 case GTU:
4331 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4332 && INTVAL (op1) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
4333 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
4334 return const0_rtx;
4335 break;
4336 }
4337
4338 return 0;
4339 }
4340
4341 /* Get the integer argument values in two forms:
4342 zero-extended in ARG0, ARG1 and sign-extended in ARG0S, ARG1S. */
4343
4344 arg0 = INTVAL (op0);
4345 arg1 = INTVAL (op1);
4346
4347 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
4348 {
4349 arg0 &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
4350 arg1 &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
4351
4352 arg0s = arg0;
4353 if (arg0s & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width - 1)))
4354 arg0s |= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << width);
4355
4356 arg1s = arg1;
4357 if (arg1s & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width - 1)))
4358 arg1s |= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << width);
4359 }
4360 else
4361 {
4362 arg0s = arg0;
4363 arg1s = arg1;
4364 }
4365
4366 /* Compute the value of the arithmetic. */
4367
4368 switch (code)
4369 {
4370 case NE:
4371 val = arg0 != arg1 ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4372 break;
4373
4374 case EQ:
4375 val = arg0 == arg1 ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4376 break;
4377
4378 case LE:
4379 val = arg0s <= arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4380 break;
4381
4382 case LT:
4383 val = arg0s < arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4384 break;
4385
4386 case GE:
4387 val = arg0s >= arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4388 break;
4389
4390 case GT:
4391 val = arg0s > arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4392 break;
4393
4394 case LEU:
4395 val = (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0)
4396 <= ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0);
4397 break;
4398
4399 case LTU:
4400 val = (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0)
4401 < ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0);
4402 break;
4403
4404 case GEU:
4405 val = (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0)
4406 >= ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0);
4407 break;
4408
4409 case GTU:
4410 val = (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0)
4411 > ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0);
4412 break;
4413
4414 default:
4415 abort ();
4416 }
4417
4418 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode, unless they and our sign
4419 bit are all one. So we get either a reasonable negative value or a
4420 reasonable unsigned value for this mode. */
4421 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
4422 && ((val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1)))
4423 != ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1))))
4424 val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
4425
4426 return GEN_INT (val);
4427 }
4428 \f
4429 /* Simplify CODE, an operation with result mode MODE and three operands,
4430 OP0, OP1, and OP2. OP0_MODE was the mode of OP0 before it became
4431 a constant. Return 0 if no simplifications is possible. */
4432
4433 rtx
4434 simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, op0_mode, op0, op1, op2)
4435 enum rtx_code code;
4436 enum machine_mode mode, op0_mode;
4437 rtx op0, op1, op2;
4438 {
4439 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
4440
4441 /* VOIDmode means "infinite" precision. */
4442 if (width == 0)
4443 width = HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT;
4444
4445 switch (code)
4446 {
4447 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
4448 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
4449 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT
4450 && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4451 && GET_CODE (op2) == CONST_INT
4452 && INTVAL (op1) + INTVAL (op2) <= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op0_mode)
4453 && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
4454 {
4455 /* Extracting a bit-field from a constant */
4456 HOST_WIDE_INT val = INTVAL (op0);
4457
4458 #if BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
4459 val >>= (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op0_mode) - INTVAL (op2) - INTVAL (op1));
4460 #else
4461 val >>= INTVAL (op2);
4462 #endif
4463 if (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT != INTVAL (op1))
4464 {
4465 /* First zero-extend. */
4466 val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << INTVAL (op1)) - 1;
4467 /* If desired, propagate sign bit. */
4468 if (code == SIGN_EXTRACT
4469 && (val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (INTVAL (op1) - 1))))
4470 val |= ~ (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << INTVAL (op1)) - 1);
4471 }
4472
4473 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
4474 unless they and our sign bit are all one.
4475 So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
4476 unsigned value for this mode. */
4477 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
4478 && ((val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1)))
4479 != ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1))))
4480 val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
4481
4482 return GEN_INT (val);
4483 }
4484 break;
4485
4486 case IF_THEN_ELSE:
4487 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
4488 return op0 != const0_rtx ? op1 : op2;
4489 break;
4490
4491 default:
4492 abort ();
4493 }
4494
4495 return 0;
4496 }
4497 \f
4498 /* If X is a nontrivial arithmetic operation on an argument
4499 for which a constant value can be determined, return
4500 the result of operating on that value, as a constant.
4501 Otherwise, return X, possibly with one or more operands
4502 modified by recursive calls to this function.
4503
4504 If X is a register whose contents are known, we do NOT
4505 return those contents here. equiv_constant is called to
4506 perform that task.
4507
4508 INSN is the insn that we may be modifying. If it is 0, make a copy
4509 of X before modifying it. */
4510
4511 static rtx
4512 fold_rtx (x, insn)
4513 rtx x;
4514 rtx insn;
4515 {
4516 register enum rtx_code code;
4517 register enum machine_mode mode;
4518 register char *fmt;
4519 register int i;
4520 rtx new = 0;
4521 int copied = 0;
4522 int must_swap = 0;
4523
4524 /* Folded equivalents of first two operands of X. */
4525 rtx folded_arg0;
4526 rtx folded_arg1;
4527
4528 /* Constant equivalents of first three operands of X;
4529 0 when no such equivalent is known. */
4530 rtx const_arg0;
4531 rtx const_arg1;
4532 rtx const_arg2;
4533
4534 /* The mode of the first operand of X. We need this for sign and zero
4535 extends. */
4536 enum machine_mode mode_arg0;
4537
4538 if (x == 0)
4539 return x;
4540
4541 mode = GET_MODE (x);
4542 code = GET_CODE (x);
4543 switch (code)
4544 {
4545 case CONST:
4546 case CONST_INT:
4547 case CONST_DOUBLE:
4548 case SYMBOL_REF:
4549 case LABEL_REF:
4550 case REG:
4551 /* No use simplifying an EXPR_LIST
4552 since they are used only for lists of args
4553 in a function call's REG_EQUAL note. */
4554 case EXPR_LIST:
4555 return x;
4556
4557 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
4558 case CC0:
4559 return prev_insn_cc0;
4560 #endif
4561
4562 case PC:
4563 /* If the next insn is a CODE_LABEL followed by a jump table,
4564 PC's value is a LABEL_REF pointing to that label. That
4565 lets us fold switch statements on the Vax. */
4566 if (insn && GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN)
4567 {
4568 rtx next = next_nonnote_insn (insn);
4569
4570 if (next && GET_CODE (next) == CODE_LABEL
4571 && NEXT_INSN (next) != 0
4572 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (next)) == JUMP_INSN
4573 && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (next))) == ADDR_VEC
4574 || GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (next))) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC))
4575 return gen_rtx (LABEL_REF, Pmode, next);
4576 }
4577 break;
4578
4579 case SUBREG:
4580 /* See if we previously assigned a constant value to this SUBREG. */
4581 if ((new = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_INT)) != 0
4582 || (new = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_DOUBLE)) != 0)
4583 return new;
4584
4585 /* If this is a paradoxical SUBREG, we have no idea what value the
4586 extra bits would have. However, if the operand is equivalent
4587 to a SUBREG whose operand is the same as our mode, and all the
4588 modes are within a word, we can just use the inner operand
4589 because these SUBREGs just say how to treat the register. */
4590
4591 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))))
4592 {
4593 enum machine_mode imode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x));
4594 struct table_elt *elt;
4595
4596 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
4597 && GET_MODE_SIZE (imode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
4598 && (elt = lookup (SUBREG_REG (x), HASH (SUBREG_REG (x), imode),
4599 imode)) != 0)
4600 {
4601 for (elt = elt->first_same_value;
4602 elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
4603 if (GET_CODE (elt->exp) == SUBREG
4604 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (elt->exp)) == mode
4605 && exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
4606 return copy_rtx (SUBREG_REG (elt->exp));
4607 }
4608
4609 return x;
4610 }
4611
4612 /* Fold SUBREG_REG. If it changed, see if we can simplify the SUBREG.
4613 We might be able to if the SUBREG is extracting a single word in an
4614 integral mode or extracting the low part. */
4615
4616 folded_arg0 = fold_rtx (SUBREG_REG (x), insn);
4617 const_arg0 = equiv_constant (folded_arg0);
4618 if (const_arg0)
4619 folded_arg0 = const_arg0;
4620
4621 if (folded_arg0 != SUBREG_REG (x))
4622 {
4623 new = 0;
4624
4625 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
4626 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == UNITS_PER_WORD
4627 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) != VOIDmode)
4628 new = operand_subword (folded_arg0, SUBREG_WORD (x), 0,
4629 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)));
4630 if (new == 0 && subreg_lowpart_p (x))
4631 new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, folded_arg0);
4632 if (new)
4633 return new;
4634 }
4635
4636 /* If this is a narrowing SUBREG and our operand is a REG, see if
4637 we can find an equivalence for REG that is an arithmetic operation
4638 in a wider mode where both operands are paradoxical SUBREGs
4639 from objects of our result mode. In that case, we couldn't report
4640 an equivalent value for that operation, since we don't know what the
4641 extra bits will be. But we can find an equivalence for this SUBREG
4642 by folding that operation is the narrow mode. This allows us to
4643 fold arithmetic in narrow modes when the machine only supports
4644 word-sized arithmetic.
4645
4646 Also look for a case where we have a SUBREG whose operand is the
4647 same as our result. If both modes are smaller than a word, we
4648 are simply interpreting a register in different modes and we
4649 can use the inner value. */
4650
4651 if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
4652 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (folded_arg0))
4653 && subreg_lowpart_p (x))
4654 {
4655 struct table_elt *elt;
4656
4657 /* We can use HASH here since we know that canon_hash won't be
4658 called. */
4659 elt = lookup (folded_arg0,
4660 HASH (folded_arg0, GET_MODE (folded_arg0)),
4661 GET_MODE (folded_arg0));
4662
4663 if (elt)
4664 elt = elt->first_same_value;
4665
4666 for (; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
4667 {
4668 enum rtx_code eltcode = GET_CODE (elt->exp);
4669
4670 /* Just check for unary and binary operations. */
4671 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (elt->exp)) == '1'
4672 && GET_CODE (elt->exp) != SIGN_EXTEND
4673 && GET_CODE (elt->exp) != ZERO_EXTEND
4674 && GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)) == SUBREG
4675 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 0))) == mode)
4676 {
4677 rtx op0 = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 0));
4678
4679 if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG && ! CONSTANT_P (op0))
4680 op0 = fold_rtx (op0, NULL_RTX);
4681
4682 op0 = equiv_constant (op0);
4683 if (op0)
4684 new = simplify_unary_operation (GET_CODE (elt->exp), mode,
4685 op0, mode);
4686 }
4687 else if ((GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (elt->exp)) == '2'
4688 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (elt->exp)) == 'c')
4689 && eltcode != DIV && eltcode != MOD
4690 && eltcode != UDIV && eltcode != UMOD
4691 && eltcode != ASHIFTRT && eltcode != LSHIFTRT
4692 && eltcode != ROTATE && eltcode != ROTATERT
4693 && ((GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)) == SUBREG
4694 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)))
4695 == mode))
4696 || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)))
4697 && ((GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 1)) == SUBREG
4698 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 1)))
4699 == mode))
4700 || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (elt->exp, 1))))
4701 {
4702 rtx op0 = gen_lowpart_common (mode, XEXP (elt->exp, 0));
4703 rtx op1 = gen_lowpart_common (mode, XEXP (elt->exp, 1));
4704
4705 if (op0 && GET_CODE (op0) != REG && ! CONSTANT_P (op0))
4706 op0 = fold_rtx (op0, NULL_RTX);
4707
4708 if (op0)
4709 op0 = equiv_constant (op0);
4710
4711 if (op1 && GET_CODE (op1) != REG && ! CONSTANT_P (op1))
4712 op1 = fold_rtx (op1, NULL_RTX);
4713
4714 if (op1)
4715 op1 = equiv_constant (op1);
4716
4717 if (op0 && op1)
4718 new = simplify_binary_operation (GET_CODE (elt->exp), mode,
4719 op0, op1);
4720 }
4721
4722 else if (GET_CODE (elt->exp) == SUBREG
4723 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (elt->exp)) == mode
4724 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (folded_arg0))
4725 <= UNITS_PER_WORD)
4726 && exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
4727 new = copy_rtx (SUBREG_REG (elt->exp));
4728
4729 if (new)
4730 return new;
4731 }
4732 }
4733
4734 return x;
4735
4736 case NOT:
4737 case NEG:
4738 /* If we have (NOT Y), see if Y is known to be (NOT Z).
4739 If so, (NOT Y) simplifies to Z. Similarly for NEG. */
4740 new = lookup_as_function (XEXP (x, 0), code);
4741 if (new)
4742 return fold_rtx (copy_rtx (XEXP (new, 0)), insn);
4743 break;
4744
4745 case MEM:
4746 /* If we are not actually processing an insn, don't try to find the
4747 best address. Not only don't we care, but we could modify the
4748 MEM in an invalid way since we have no insn to validate against. */
4749 if (insn != 0)
4750 find_best_addr (insn, &XEXP (x, 0));
4751
4752 {
4753 /* Even if we don't fold in the insn itself,
4754 we can safely do so here, in hopes of getting a constant. */
4755 rtx addr = fold_rtx (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX);
4756 rtx base = 0;
4757 HOST_WIDE_INT offset = 0;
4758
4759 if (GET_CODE (addr) == REG
4760 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (addr))
4761 && GET_MODE (addr) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]]
4762 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]] != 0)
4763 addr = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]];
4764
4765 /* If address is constant, split it into a base and integer offset. */
4766 if (GET_CODE (addr) == SYMBOL_REF || GET_CODE (addr) == LABEL_REF)
4767 base = addr;
4768 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == PLUS
4769 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT)
4770 {
4771 base = XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 0);
4772 offset = INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 1));
4773 }
4774 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == LO_SUM
4775 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == SYMBOL_REF)
4776 base = XEXP (addr, 1);
4777
4778 /* If this is a constant pool reference, we can fold it into its
4779 constant to allow better value tracking. */
4780 if (base && GET_CODE (base) == SYMBOL_REF
4781 && CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (base))
4782 {
4783 rtx constant = get_pool_constant (base);
4784 enum machine_mode const_mode = get_pool_mode (base);
4785 rtx new;
4786
4787 if (CONSTANT_P (constant) && GET_CODE (constant) != CONST_INT)
4788 constant_pool_entries_cost = COST (constant);
4789
4790 /* If we are loading the full constant, we have an equivalence. */
4791 if (offset == 0 && mode == const_mode)
4792 return constant;
4793
4794 /* If this actually isn't a constant (wierd!), we can't do
4795 anything. Otherwise, handle the two most common cases:
4796 extracting a word from a multi-word constant, and extracting
4797 the low-order bits. Other cases don't seem common enough to
4798 worry about. */
4799 if (! CONSTANT_P (constant))
4800 return x;
4801
4802 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
4803 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == UNITS_PER_WORD
4804 && offset % UNITS_PER_WORD == 0
4805 && (new = operand_subword (constant,
4806 offset / UNITS_PER_WORD,
4807 0, const_mode)) != 0)
4808 return new;
4809
4810 if (((BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
4811 && offset == GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (constant)) - 1)
4812 || (! BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN && offset == 0))
4813 && (new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, constant)) != 0)
4814 return new;
4815 }
4816
4817 /* If this is a reference to a label at a known position in a jump
4818 table, we also know its value. */
4819 if (base && GET_CODE (base) == LABEL_REF)
4820 {
4821 rtx label = XEXP (base, 0);
4822 rtx table_insn = NEXT_INSN (label);
4823
4824 if (table_insn && GET_CODE (table_insn) == JUMP_INSN
4825 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (table_insn)) == ADDR_VEC)
4826 {
4827 rtx table = PATTERN (table_insn);
4828
4829 if (offset >= 0
4830 && (offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table))
4831 < XVECLEN (table, 0)))
4832 return XVECEXP (table, 0,
4833 offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table)));
4834 }
4835 if (table_insn && GET_CODE (table_insn) == JUMP_INSN
4836 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (table_insn)) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC)
4837 {
4838 rtx table = PATTERN (table_insn);
4839
4840 if (offset >= 0
4841 && (offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table))
4842 < XVECLEN (table, 1)))
4843 {
4844 offset /= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table));
4845 new = gen_rtx (MINUS, Pmode, XVECEXP (table, 1, offset),
4846 XEXP (table, 0));
4847
4848 if (GET_MODE (table) != Pmode)
4849 new = gen_rtx (TRUNCATE, GET_MODE (table), new);
4850
4851 return new;
4852 }
4853 }
4854 }
4855
4856 return x;
4857 }
4858 }
4859
4860 const_arg0 = 0;
4861 const_arg1 = 0;
4862 const_arg2 = 0;
4863 mode_arg0 = VOIDmode;
4864
4865 /* Try folding our operands.
4866 Then see which ones have constant values known. */
4867
4868 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
4869 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
4870 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
4871 {
4872 rtx arg = XEXP (x, i);
4873 rtx folded_arg = arg, const_arg = 0;
4874 enum machine_mode mode_arg = GET_MODE (arg);
4875 rtx cheap_arg, expensive_arg;
4876 rtx replacements[2];
4877 int j;
4878
4879 /* Most arguments are cheap, so handle them specially. */
4880 switch (GET_CODE (arg))
4881 {
4882 case REG:
4883 /* This is the same as calling equiv_constant; it is duplicated
4884 here for speed. */
4885 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (arg))
4886 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]] != 0
4887 && GET_CODE (qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]) != REG
4888 && GET_CODE (qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]) != PLUS)
4889 const_arg
4890 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (arg),
4891 qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]);
4892 break;
4893
4894 case CONST:
4895 case CONST_INT:
4896 case SYMBOL_REF:
4897 case LABEL_REF:
4898 case CONST_DOUBLE:
4899 const_arg = arg;
4900 break;
4901
4902 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
4903 case CC0:
4904 folded_arg = prev_insn_cc0;
4905 mode_arg = prev_insn_cc0_mode;
4906 const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
4907 break;
4908 #endif
4909
4910 default:
4911 folded_arg = fold_rtx (arg, insn);
4912 const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
4913 }
4914
4915 /* For the first three operands, see if the operand
4916 is constant or equivalent to a constant. */
4917 switch (i)
4918 {
4919 case 0:
4920 folded_arg0 = folded_arg;
4921 const_arg0 = const_arg;
4922 mode_arg0 = mode_arg;
4923 break;
4924 case 1:
4925 folded_arg1 = folded_arg;
4926 const_arg1 = const_arg;
4927 break;
4928 case 2:
4929 const_arg2 = const_arg;
4930 break;
4931 }
4932
4933 /* Pick the least expensive of the folded argument and an
4934 equivalent constant argument. */
4935 if (const_arg == 0 || const_arg == folded_arg
4936 || COST (const_arg) > COST (folded_arg))
4937 cheap_arg = folded_arg, expensive_arg = const_arg;
4938 else
4939 cheap_arg = const_arg, expensive_arg = folded_arg;
4940
4941 /* Try to replace the operand with the cheapest of the two
4942 possibilities. If it doesn't work and this is either of the first
4943 two operands of a commutative operation, try swapping them.
4944 If THAT fails, try the more expensive, provided it is cheaper
4945 than what is already there. */
4946
4947 if (cheap_arg == XEXP (x, i))
4948 continue;
4949
4950 if (insn == 0 && ! copied)
4951 {
4952 x = copy_rtx (x);
4953 copied = 1;
4954 }
4955
4956 replacements[0] = cheap_arg, replacements[1] = expensive_arg;
4957 for (j = 0;
4958 j < 2 && replacements[j]
4959 && COST (replacements[j]) < COST (XEXP (x, i));
4960 j++)
4961 {
4962 if (validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), replacements[j], 0))
4963 break;
4964
4965 if (code == NE || code == EQ || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c')
4966 {
4967 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), XEXP (x, 1 - i), 1);
4968 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 1 - i), replacements[j], 1);
4969
4970 if (apply_change_group ())
4971 {
4972 /* Swap them back to be invalid so that this loop can
4973 continue and flag them to be swapped back later. */
4974 rtx tem;
4975
4976 tem = XEXP (x, 0); XEXP (x, 0) = XEXP (x, 1);
4977 XEXP (x, 1) = tem;
4978 must_swap = 1;
4979 break;
4980 }
4981 }
4982 }
4983 }
4984
4985 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
4986 /* Don't try to fold inside of a vector of expressions.
4987 Doing nothing is harmless. */
4988 ;
4989
4990 /* If a commutative operation, place a constant integer as the second
4991 operand unless the first operand is also a constant integer. Otherwise,
4992 place any constant second unless the first operand is also a constant. */
4993
4994 if (code == EQ || code == NE || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c')
4995 {
4996 if (must_swap || (const_arg0
4997 && (const_arg1 == 0
4998 || (GET_CODE (const_arg0) == CONST_INT
4999 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) != CONST_INT))))
5000 {
5001 register rtx tem = XEXP (x, 0);
5002
5003 if (insn == 0 && ! copied)
5004 {
5005 x = copy_rtx (x);
5006 copied = 1;
5007 }
5008
5009 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1), 1);
5010 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 1), tem, 1);
5011 if (apply_change_group ())
5012 {
5013 tem = const_arg0, const_arg0 = const_arg1, const_arg1 = tem;
5014 tem = folded_arg0, folded_arg0 = folded_arg1, folded_arg1 = tem;
5015 }
5016 }
5017 }
5018
5019 /* If X is an arithmetic operation, see if we can simplify it. */
5020
5021 switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code))
5022 {
5023 case '1':
5024 /* We can't simplify extension ops unless we know the original mode. */
5025 if ((code == ZERO_EXTEND || code == SIGN_EXTEND)
5026 && mode_arg0 == VOIDmode)
5027 break;
5028 new = simplify_unary_operation (code, mode,
5029 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
5030 mode_arg0);
5031 break;
5032
5033 case '<':
5034 /* See what items are actually being compared and set FOLDED_ARG[01]
5035 to those values and CODE to the actual comparison code. If any are
5036 constant, set CONST_ARG0 and CONST_ARG1 appropriately. We needn't
5037 do anything if both operands are already known to be constant. */
5038
5039 if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
5040 {
5041 struct table_elt *p0, *p1;
5042 rtx true = const_true_rtx, false = const0_rtx;
5043 enum machine_mode mode_arg1;
5044
5045 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
5046 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
5047 {
5048 true = immed_real_const_1 (FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE, mode);
5049 false = CONST0_RTX (mode);
5050 }
5051 #endif
5052
5053 code = find_comparison_args (code, &folded_arg0, &folded_arg1,
5054 &mode_arg0, &mode_arg1);
5055 const_arg0 = equiv_constant (folded_arg0);
5056 const_arg1 = equiv_constant (folded_arg1);
5057
5058 /* If the mode is VOIDmode or a MODE_CC mode, we don't know
5059 what kinds of things are being compared, so we can't do
5060 anything with this comparison. */
5061
5062 if (mode_arg0 == VOIDmode || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) == MODE_CC)
5063 break;
5064
5065 /* If we do not now have two constants being compared, see if we
5066 can nevertheless deduce some things about the comparison. */
5067 if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
5068 {
5069 /* Is FOLDED_ARG0 frame-pointer plus a constant? Or non-explicit
5070 constant? These aren't zero, but we don't know their sign. */
5071 if (const_arg1 == const0_rtx
5072 && (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (folded_arg0)
5073 #if 0 /* Sad to say, on sysvr4, #pragma weak can make a symbol address
5074 come out as 0. */
5075 || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == SYMBOL_REF
5076 #endif
5077 || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == LABEL_REF
5078 || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == CONST))
5079 {
5080 if (code == EQ)
5081 return false;
5082 else if (code == NE)
5083 return true;
5084 }
5085
5086 /* See if the two operands are the same. We don't do this
5087 for IEEE floating-point since we can't assume x == x
5088 since x might be a NaN. */
5089
5090 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
5091 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) != MODE_FLOAT)
5092 && (folded_arg0 == folded_arg1
5093 || (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
5094 && GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == REG
5095 && (reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg0)]
5096 == reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg1)]))
5097 || ((p0 = lookup (folded_arg0,
5098 (safe_hash (folded_arg0, mode_arg0)
5099 % NBUCKETS), mode_arg0))
5100 && (p1 = lookup (folded_arg1,
5101 (safe_hash (folded_arg1, mode_arg0)
5102 % NBUCKETS), mode_arg0))
5103 && p0->first_same_value == p1->first_same_value)))
5104 return ((code == EQ || code == LE || code == GE
5105 || code == LEU || code == GEU)
5106 ? true : false);
5107
5108 /* If FOLDED_ARG0 is a register, see if the comparison we are
5109 doing now is either the same as we did before or the reverse
5110 (we only check the reverse if not floating-point). */
5111 else if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG)
5112 {
5113 int qty = reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg0)];
5114
5115 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (folded_arg0))
5116 && (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty], code)
5117 || (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty],
5118 reverse_condition (code))
5119 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) == MODE_INT))
5120 && (rtx_equal_p (qty_comparison_const[qty], folded_arg1)
5121 || (const_arg1
5122 && rtx_equal_p (qty_comparison_const[qty],
5123 const_arg1))
5124 || (GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == REG
5125 && (reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg1)]
5126 == qty_comparison_qty[qty]))))
5127 return (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty],
5128 code)
5129 ? true : false);
5130 }
5131 }
5132 }
5133
5134 /* If we are comparing against zero, see if the first operand is
5135 equivalent to an IOR with a constant. If so, we may be able to
5136 determine the result of this comparison. */
5137
5138 if (const_arg1 == const0_rtx)
5139 {
5140 rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, IOR);
5141 rtx inner_const;
5142
5143 if (y != 0
5144 && (inner_const = equiv_constant (XEXP (y, 1))) != 0
5145 && GET_CODE (inner_const) == CONST_INT
5146 && INTVAL (inner_const) != 0)
5147 {
5148 int sign_bitnum = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode_arg0) - 1;
5149 int has_sign = (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT >= sign_bitnum
5150 && (INTVAL (inner_const)
5151 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << sign_bitnum)));
5152 rtx true = const_true_rtx, false = const0_rtx;
5153
5154 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
5155 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
5156 {
5157 true = immed_real_const_1 (FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE, mode);
5158 false = CONST0_RTX (mode);
5159 }
5160 #endif
5161
5162 switch (code)
5163 {
5164 case EQ:
5165 return false;
5166 case NE:
5167 return true;
5168 case LT: case LE:
5169 if (has_sign)
5170 return true;
5171 break;
5172 case GT: case GE:
5173 if (has_sign)
5174 return false;
5175 break;
5176 }
5177 }
5178 }
5179
5180 new = simplify_relational_operation (code, mode_arg0,
5181 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
5182 const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1);
5183 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
5184 if (new != 0 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
5185 new = ((new == const0_rtx) ? CONST0_RTX (mode)
5186 : immed_real_const_1 (FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE, mode));
5187 #endif
5188 break;
5189
5190 case '2':
5191 case 'c':
5192 switch (code)
5193 {
5194 case PLUS:
5195 /* If the second operand is a LABEL_REF, see if the first is a MINUS
5196 with that LABEL_REF as its second operand. If so, the result is
5197 the first operand of that MINUS. This handles switches with an
5198 ADDR_DIFF_VEC table. */
5199 if (const_arg1 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == LABEL_REF)
5200 {
5201 rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, MINUS);
5202
5203 if (y != 0 && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 1)) == LABEL_REF
5204 && XEXP (XEXP (y, 1), 0) == XEXP (const_arg1, 0))
5205 return XEXP (y, 0);
5206 }
5207 goto from_plus;
5208
5209 case MINUS:
5210 /* If we have (MINUS Y C), see if Y is known to be (PLUS Z C2).
5211 If so, produce (PLUS Z C2-C). */
5212 if (const_arg1 != 0 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == CONST_INT)
5213 {
5214 rtx y = lookup_as_function (XEXP (x, 0), PLUS);
5215 if (y && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 1)) == CONST_INT)
5216 return fold_rtx (plus_constant (y, -INTVAL (const_arg1)),
5217 NULL_RTX);
5218 }
5219
5220 /* ... fall through ... */
5221
5222 from_plus:
5223 case SMIN: case SMAX: case UMIN: case UMAX:
5224 case IOR: case AND: case XOR:
5225 case MULT: case DIV: case UDIV:
5226 case ASHIFT: case LSHIFTRT: case ASHIFTRT:
5227 /* If we have (<op> <reg> <const_int>) for an associative OP and REG
5228 is known to be of similar form, we may be able to replace the
5229 operation with a combined operation. This may eliminate the
5230 intermediate operation if every use is simplified in this way.
5231 Note that the similar optimization done by combine.c only works
5232 if the intermediate operation's result has only one reference. */
5233
5234 if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
5235 && const_arg1 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == CONST_INT)
5236 {
5237 int is_shift
5238 = (code == ASHIFT || code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT);
5239 rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, code);
5240 rtx inner_const;
5241 enum rtx_code associate_code;
5242 rtx new_const;
5243
5244 if (y == 0
5245 || 0 == (inner_const
5246 = equiv_constant (fold_rtx (XEXP (y, 1), 0)))
5247 || GET_CODE (inner_const) != CONST_INT
5248 /* If we have compiled a statement like
5249 "if (x == (x & mask1))", and now are looking at
5250 "x & mask2", we will have a case where the first operand
5251 of Y is the same as our first operand. Unless we detect
5252 this case, an infinite loop will result. */
5253 || XEXP (y, 0) == folded_arg0)
5254 break;
5255
5256 /* Don't associate these operations if they are a PLUS with the
5257 same constant and it is a power of two. These might be doable
5258 with a pre- or post-increment. Similarly for two subtracts of
5259 identical powers of two with post decrement. */
5260
5261 if (code == PLUS && INTVAL (const_arg1) == INTVAL (inner_const)
5262 && (0
5263 #if defined(HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT) || defined(HAVE_POST_INCREMENT)
5264 || exact_log2 (INTVAL (const_arg1)) >= 0
5265 #endif
5266 #if defined(HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT) || defined(HAVE_POST_DECREMENT)
5267 || exact_log2 (- INTVAL (const_arg1)) >= 0
5268 #endif
5269 ))
5270 break;
5271
5272 /* Compute the code used to compose the constants. For example,
5273 A/C1/C2 is A/(C1 * C2), so if CODE == DIV, we want MULT. */
5274
5275 associate_code
5276 = (code == MULT || code == DIV || code == UDIV ? MULT
5277 : is_shift || code == PLUS || code == MINUS ? PLUS : code);
5278
5279 new_const = simplify_binary_operation (associate_code, mode,
5280 const_arg1, inner_const);
5281
5282 if (new_const == 0)
5283 break;
5284
5285 /* If we are associating shift operations, don't let this
5286 produce a shift of larger than the object. This could
5287 occur when we following a sign-extend by a right shift on
5288 a machine that does a sign-extend as a pair of shifts. */
5289
5290 if (is_shift && GET_CODE (new_const) == CONST_INT
5291 && INTVAL (new_const) > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
5292 break;
5293
5294 y = copy_rtx (XEXP (y, 0));
5295
5296 /* If Y contains our first operand (the most common way this
5297 can happen is if Y is a MEM), we would do into an infinite
5298 loop if we tried to fold it. So don't in that case. */
5299
5300 if (! reg_mentioned_p (folded_arg0, y))
5301 y = fold_rtx (y, insn);
5302
5303 return cse_gen_binary (code, mode, y, new_const);
5304 }
5305 }
5306
5307 new = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode,
5308 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
5309 const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1);
5310 break;
5311
5312 case 'o':
5313 /* (lo_sum (high X) X) is simply X. */
5314 if (code == LO_SUM && const_arg0 != 0
5315 && GET_CODE (const_arg0) == HIGH
5316 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (const_arg0, 0), const_arg1))
5317 return const_arg1;
5318 break;
5319
5320 case '3':
5321 case 'b':
5322 new = simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, mode_arg0,
5323 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
5324 const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1,
5325 const_arg2 ? const_arg2 : XEXP (x, 2));
5326 break;
5327 }
5328
5329 return new ? new : x;
5330 }
5331 \f
5332 /* Return a constant value currently equivalent to X.
5333 Return 0 if we don't know one. */
5334
5335 static rtx
5336 equiv_constant (x)
5337 rtx x;
5338 {
5339 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG
5340 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
5341 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
5342 x = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]);
5343
5344 if (x != 0 && CONSTANT_P (x))
5345 return x;
5346
5347 /* If X is a MEM, try to fold it outside the context of any insn to see if
5348 it might be equivalent to a constant. That handles the case where it
5349 is a constant-pool reference. Then try to look it up in the hash table
5350 in case it is something whose value we have seen before. */
5351
5352 if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
5353 {
5354 struct table_elt *elt;
5355
5356 x = fold_rtx (x, NULL_RTX);
5357 if (CONSTANT_P (x))
5358 return x;
5359
5360 elt = lookup (x, safe_hash (x, GET_MODE (x)) % NBUCKETS, GET_MODE (x));
5361 if (elt == 0)
5362 return 0;
5363
5364 for (elt = elt->first_same_value; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
5365 if (elt->is_const && CONSTANT_P (elt->exp))
5366 return elt->exp;
5367 }
5368
5369 return 0;
5370 }
5371 \f
5372 /* Assuming that X is an rtx (e.g., MEM, REG or SUBREG) for a fixed-point
5373 number, return an rtx (MEM, SUBREG, or CONST_INT) that refers to the
5374 least-significant part of X.
5375 MODE specifies how big a part of X to return.
5376
5377 If the requested operation cannot be done, 0 is returned.
5378
5379 This is similar to gen_lowpart in emit-rtl.c. */
5380
5381 rtx
5382 gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, x)
5383 enum machine_mode mode;
5384 register rtx x;
5385 {
5386 rtx result = gen_lowpart_common (mode, x);
5387
5388 if (result)
5389 return result;
5390 else if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
5391 {
5392 /* This is the only other case we handle. */
5393 register int offset = 0;
5394 rtx new;
5395
5396 #if WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
5397 offset = (MAX (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)), UNITS_PER_WORD)
5398 - MAX (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), UNITS_PER_WORD));
5399 #endif
5400 #if BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
5401 /* Adjust the address so that the address-after-the-data
5402 is unchanged. */
5403 offset -= (MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
5404 - MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))));
5405 #endif
5406 new = gen_rtx (MEM, mode, plus_constant (XEXP (x, 0), offset));
5407 if (! memory_address_p (mode, XEXP (new, 0)))
5408 return 0;
5409 MEM_VOLATILE_P (new) = MEM_VOLATILE_P (x);
5410 RTX_UNCHANGING_P (new) = RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x);
5411 MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (new) = MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (x);
5412 return new;
5413 }
5414 else
5415 return 0;
5416 }
5417 \f
5418 /* Given INSN, a jump insn, TAKEN indicates if we are following the "taken"
5419 branch. It will be zero if not.
5420
5421 In certain cases, this can cause us to add an equivalence. For example,
5422 if we are following the taken case of
5423 if (i == 2)
5424 we can add the fact that `i' and '2' are now equivalent.
5425
5426 In any case, we can record that this comparison was passed. If the same
5427 comparison is seen later, we will know its value. */
5428
5429 static void
5430 record_jump_equiv (insn, taken)
5431 rtx insn;
5432 int taken;
5433 {
5434 int cond_known_true;
5435 rtx op0, op1;
5436 enum machine_mode mode, mode0, mode1;
5437 int reversed_nonequality = 0;
5438 enum rtx_code code;
5439
5440 /* Ensure this is the right kind of insn. */
5441 if (! condjump_p (insn) || simplejump_p (insn))
5442 return;
5443
5444 /* See if this jump condition is known true or false. */
5445 if (taken)
5446 cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 2) == pc_rtx);
5447 else
5448 cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 1) == pc_rtx);
5449
5450 /* Get the type of comparison being done and the operands being compared.
5451 If we had to reverse a non-equality condition, record that fact so we
5452 know that it isn't valid for floating-point. */
5453 code = GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0));
5454 op0 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0), 0), insn);
5455 op1 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0), 1), insn);
5456
5457 code = find_comparison_args (code, &op0, &op1, &mode0, &mode1);
5458 if (! cond_known_true)
5459 {
5460 reversed_nonequality = (code != EQ && code != NE);
5461 code = reverse_condition (code);
5462 }
5463
5464 /* The mode is the mode of the non-constant. */
5465 mode = mode0;
5466 if (mode1 != VOIDmode)
5467 mode = mode1;
5468
5469 record_jump_cond (code, mode, op0, op1, reversed_nonequality);
5470 }
5471
5472 /* We know that comparison CODE applied to OP0 and OP1 in MODE is true.
5473 REVERSED_NONEQUALITY is nonzero if CODE had to be swapped.
5474 Make any useful entries we can with that information. Called from
5475 above function and called recursively. */
5476
5477 static void
5478 record_jump_cond (code, mode, op0, op1, reversed_nonequality)
5479 enum rtx_code code;
5480 enum machine_mode mode;
5481 rtx op0, op1;
5482 int reversed_nonequality;
5483 {
5484 int op0_hash_code, op1_hash_code;
5485 int op0_in_memory, op0_in_struct, op1_in_memory, op1_in_struct;
5486 struct table_elt *op0_elt, *op1_elt;
5487
5488 /* If OP0 and OP1 are known equal, and either is a paradoxical SUBREG,
5489 we know that they are also equal in the smaller mode (this is also
5490 true for all smaller modes whether or not there is a SUBREG, but
5491 is not worth testing for with no SUBREG. */
5492
5493 /* Note that GET_MODE (op0) may not equal MODE. */
5494 if (code == EQ && GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
5495 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op0))
5496 > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)))))
5497 {
5498 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
5499 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op1);
5500
5501 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0),
5502 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op1, 0),
5503 reversed_nonequality);
5504 }
5505
5506 if (code == EQ && GET_CODE (op1) == SUBREG
5507 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op1))
5508 > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1)))))
5509 {
5510 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
5511 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op0);
5512
5513 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1),
5514 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op0, 0),
5515 reversed_nonequality);
5516 }
5517
5518 /* Similarly, if this is an NE comparison, and either is a SUBREG
5519 making a smaller mode, we know the whole thing is also NE. */
5520
5521 /* Note that GET_MODE (op0) may not equal MODE;
5522 if we test MODE instead, we can get an infinite recursion
5523 alternating between two modes each wider than MODE. */
5524
5525 if (code == NE && GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
5526 && subreg_lowpart_p (op0)
5527 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op0))
5528 < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)))))
5529 {
5530 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
5531 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op1);
5532
5533 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0),
5534 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op1, 0),
5535 reversed_nonequality);
5536 }
5537
5538 if (code == NE && GET_CODE (op1) == SUBREG
5539 && subreg_lowpart_p (op1)
5540 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op1))
5541 < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1)))))
5542 {
5543 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
5544 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op0);
5545
5546 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1),
5547 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op0, 0),
5548 reversed_nonequality);
5549 }
5550
5551 /* Hash both operands. */
5552
5553 do_not_record = 0;
5554 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5555 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
5556 op0_hash_code = HASH (op0, mode);
5557 op0_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5558 op0_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
5559
5560 if (do_not_record)
5561 return;
5562
5563 do_not_record = 0;
5564 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5565 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
5566 op1_hash_code = HASH (op1, mode);
5567 op1_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5568 op1_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
5569
5570 if (do_not_record)
5571 return;
5572
5573 /* Look up both operands. */
5574 op0_elt = lookup (op0, op0_hash_code, mode);
5575 op1_elt = lookup (op1, op1_hash_code, mode);
5576
5577 /* If we aren't setting two things equal all we can do is save this
5578 comparison. Similarly if this is floating-point. In the latter
5579 case, OP1 might be zero and both -0.0 and 0.0 are equal to it.
5580 If we record the equality, we might inadvertently delete code
5581 whose intent was to change -0 to +0. */
5582
5583 if (code != EQ || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_FLOAT)
5584 {
5585 /* If we reversed a floating-point comparison, if OP0 is not a
5586 register, or if OP1 is neither a register or constant, we can't
5587 do anything. */
5588
5589 if (GET_CODE (op1) != REG)
5590 op1 = equiv_constant (op1);
5591
5592 if ((reversed_nonequality && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
5593 || GET_CODE (op0) != REG || op1 == 0)
5594 return;
5595
5596 /* Put OP0 in the hash table if it isn't already. This gives it a
5597 new quantity number. */
5598 if (op0_elt == 0)
5599 {
5600 if (insert_regs (op0, NULL_PTR, 0))
5601 {
5602 rehash_using_reg (op0);
5603 op0_hash_code = HASH (op0, mode);
5604 }
5605
5606 op0_elt = insert (op0, NULL_PTR, op0_hash_code, mode);
5607 op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
5608 op0_elt->in_struct = op0_in_struct;
5609 }
5610
5611 qty_comparison_code[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = code;
5612 if (GET_CODE (op1) == REG)
5613 {
5614 /* Put OP1 in the hash table so it gets a new quantity number. */
5615 if (op1_elt == 0)
5616 {
5617 if (insert_regs (op1, NULL_PTR, 0))
5618 {
5619 rehash_using_reg (op1);
5620 op1_hash_code = HASH (op1, mode);
5621 }
5622
5623 op1_elt = insert (op1, NULL_PTR, op1_hash_code, mode);
5624 op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
5625 op1_elt->in_struct = op1_in_struct;
5626 }
5627
5628 qty_comparison_qty[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = reg_qty[REGNO (op1)];
5629 qty_comparison_const[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = 0;
5630 }
5631 else
5632 {
5633 qty_comparison_qty[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = -1;
5634 qty_comparison_const[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = op1;
5635 }
5636
5637 return;
5638 }
5639
5640 /* If both are equivalent, merge the two classes. Save this class for
5641 `cse_set_around_loop'. */
5642 if (op0_elt && op1_elt)
5643 {
5644 merge_equiv_classes (op0_elt, op1_elt);
5645 last_jump_equiv_class = op0_elt;
5646 }
5647
5648 /* For whichever side doesn't have an equivalence, make one. */
5649 if (op0_elt == 0)
5650 {
5651 if (insert_regs (op0, op1_elt, 0))
5652 {
5653 rehash_using_reg (op0);
5654 op0_hash_code = HASH (op0, mode);
5655 }
5656
5657 op0_elt = insert (op0, op1_elt, op0_hash_code, mode);
5658 op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
5659 op0_elt->in_struct = op0_in_struct;
5660 last_jump_equiv_class = op0_elt;
5661 }
5662
5663 if (op1_elt == 0)
5664 {
5665 if (insert_regs (op1, op0_elt, 0))
5666 {
5667 rehash_using_reg (op1);
5668 op1_hash_code = HASH (op1, mode);
5669 }
5670
5671 op1_elt = insert (op1, op0_elt, op1_hash_code, mode);
5672 op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
5673 op1_elt->in_struct = op1_in_struct;
5674 last_jump_equiv_class = op1_elt;
5675 }
5676 }
5677 \f
5678 /* CSE processing for one instruction.
5679 First simplify sources and addresses of all assignments
5680 in the instruction, using previously-computed equivalents values.
5681 Then install the new sources and destinations in the table
5682 of available values.
5683
5684 If IN_LIBCALL_BLOCK is nonzero, don't record any equivalence made in
5685 the insn. */
5686
5687 /* Data on one SET contained in the instruction. */
5688
5689 struct set
5690 {
5691 /* The SET rtx itself. */
5692 rtx rtl;
5693 /* The SET_SRC of the rtx (the original value, if it is changing). */
5694 rtx src;
5695 /* The hash-table element for the SET_SRC of the SET. */
5696 struct table_elt *src_elt;
5697 /* Hash code for the SET_SRC. */
5698 int src_hash_code;
5699 /* Hash code for the SET_DEST. */
5700 int dest_hash_code;
5701 /* The SET_DEST, with SUBREG, etc., stripped. */
5702 rtx inner_dest;
5703 /* Place where the pointer to the INNER_DEST was found. */
5704 rtx *inner_dest_loc;
5705 /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC is in memory. */
5706 char src_in_memory;
5707 /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC is in a structure. */
5708 char src_in_struct;
5709 /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC contains something
5710 whose value cannot be predicted and understood. */
5711 char src_volatile;
5712 /* Original machine mode, in case it becomes a CONST_INT. */
5713 enum machine_mode mode;
5714 /* A constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any. */
5715 rtx src_const;
5716 /* Hash code of constant equivalent for SET_SRC. */
5717 int src_const_hash_code;
5718 /* Table entry for constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any. */
5719 struct table_elt *src_const_elt;
5720 };
5721
5722 static void
5723 cse_insn (insn, in_libcall_block)
5724 rtx insn;
5725 int in_libcall_block;
5726 {
5727 register rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
5728 rtx tem;
5729 register int i;
5730 register int n_sets = 0;
5731
5732 /* Records what this insn does to set CC0. */
5733 rtx this_insn_cc0 = 0;
5734 enum machine_mode this_insn_cc0_mode;
5735 struct write_data writes_memory;
5736 static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
5737
5738 rtx src_eqv = 0;
5739 struct table_elt *src_eqv_elt = 0;
5740 int src_eqv_volatile;
5741 int src_eqv_in_memory;
5742 int src_eqv_in_struct;
5743 int src_eqv_hash_code;
5744
5745 struct set *sets;
5746
5747 this_insn = insn;
5748 writes_memory = init;
5749
5750 /* Find all the SETs and CLOBBERs in this instruction.
5751 Record all the SETs in the array `set' and count them.
5752 Also determine whether there is a CLOBBER that invalidates
5753 all memory references, or all references at varying addresses. */
5754
5755 if (GET_CODE (x) == SET)
5756 {
5757 sets = (struct set *) alloca (sizeof (struct set));
5758 sets[0].rtl = x;
5759
5760 /* Ignore SETs that are unconditional jumps.
5761 They never need cse processing, so this does not hurt.
5762 The reason is not efficiency but rather
5763 so that we can test at the end for instructions
5764 that have been simplified to unconditional jumps
5765 and not be misled by unchanged instructions
5766 that were unconditional jumps to begin with. */
5767 if (SET_DEST (x) == pc_rtx
5768 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == LABEL_REF)
5769 ;
5770
5771 /* Don't count call-insns, (set (reg 0) (call ...)), as a set.
5772 The hard function value register is used only once, to copy to
5773 someplace else, so it isn't worth cse'ing (and on 80386 is unsafe)!
5774 Ensure we invalidate the destination register. On the 80386 no
5775 other code would invalidate it since it is a fixed_reg.
5776 We need not check the return of apply_change_group; see canon_reg. */
5777
5778 else if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == CALL)
5779 {
5780 canon_reg (SET_SRC (x), insn);
5781 apply_change_group ();
5782 fold_rtx (SET_SRC (x), insn);
5783 invalidate (SET_DEST (x));
5784 }
5785 else
5786 n_sets = 1;
5787 }
5788 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
5789 {
5790 register int lim = XVECLEN (x, 0);
5791
5792 sets = (struct set *) alloca (lim * sizeof (struct set));
5793
5794 /* Find all regs explicitly clobbered in this insn,
5795 and ensure they are not replaced with any other regs
5796 elsewhere in this insn.
5797 When a reg that is clobbered is also used for input,
5798 we should presume that that is for a reason,
5799 and we should not substitute some other register
5800 which is not supposed to be clobbered.
5801 Therefore, this loop cannot be merged into the one below
5802 because a CALL may precede a CLOBBER and refer to the
5803 value clobbered. We must not let a canonicalization do
5804 anything in that case. */
5805 for (i = 0; i < lim; i++)
5806 {
5807 register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
5808 if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER
5809 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == REG
5810 || GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == SUBREG))
5811 invalidate (XEXP (y, 0));
5812 }
5813
5814 for (i = 0; i < lim; i++)
5815 {
5816 register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
5817 if (GET_CODE (y) == SET)
5818 {
5819 /* As above, we ignore unconditional jumps and call-insns and
5820 ignore the result of apply_change_group. */
5821 if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == CALL)
5822 {
5823 canon_reg (SET_SRC (y), insn);
5824 apply_change_group ();
5825 fold_rtx (SET_SRC (y), insn);
5826 invalidate (SET_DEST (y));
5827 }
5828 else if (SET_DEST (y) == pc_rtx
5829 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == LABEL_REF)
5830 ;
5831 else
5832 sets[n_sets++].rtl = y;
5833 }
5834 else if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
5835 {
5836 /* If we clobber memory, take note of that,
5837 and canon the address.
5838 This does nothing when a register is clobbered
5839 because we have already invalidated the reg. */
5840 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == MEM)
5841 {
5842 canon_reg (XEXP (y, 0), NULL_RTX);
5843 note_mem_written (XEXP (y, 0), &writes_memory);
5844 }
5845 }
5846 else if (GET_CODE (y) == USE
5847 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == REG
5848 && REGNO (XEXP (y, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
5849 canon_reg (y, NULL_RTX);
5850 else if (GET_CODE (y) == CALL)
5851 {
5852 /* The result of apply_change_group can be ignored; see
5853 canon_reg. */
5854 canon_reg (y, insn);
5855 apply_change_group ();
5856 fold_rtx (y, insn);
5857 }
5858 }
5859 }
5860 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
5861 {
5862 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MEM)
5863 {
5864 canon_reg (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX);
5865 note_mem_written (XEXP (x, 0), &writes_memory);
5866 }
5867 }
5868
5869 /* Canonicalize a USE of a pseudo register or memory location. */
5870 else if (GET_CODE (x) == USE
5871 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
5872 && REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
5873 canon_reg (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX);
5874 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CALL)
5875 {
5876 /* The result of apply_change_group can be ignored; see canon_reg. */
5877 canon_reg (x, insn);
5878 apply_change_group ();
5879 fold_rtx (x, insn);
5880 }
5881
5882 if (n_sets == 1 && REG_NOTES (insn) != 0)
5883 {
5884 /* Store the equivalent value in SRC_EQV, if different. */
5885 rtx tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX);
5886
5887 if (tem && ! rtx_equal_p (XEXP (tem, 0), SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)))
5888 src_eqv = canon_reg (XEXP (tem, 0), NULL_RTX);
5889 }
5890
5891 /* Canonicalize sources and addresses of destinations.
5892 We do this in a separate pass to avoid problems when a MATCH_DUP is
5893 present in the insn pattern. In that case, we want to ensure that
5894 we don't break the duplicate nature of the pattern. So we will replace
5895 both operands at the same time. Otherwise, we would fail to find an
5896 equivalent substitution in the loop calling validate_change below.
5897
5898 We used to suppress canonicalization of DEST if it appears in SRC,
5899 but we don't do this any more. */
5900
5901 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
5902 {
5903 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
5904 rtx src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
5905 rtx new = canon_reg (src, insn);
5906
5907 if ((GET_CODE (new) == REG && GET_CODE (src) == REG
5908 && ((REGNO (new) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
5909 != (REGNO (src) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)))
5910 || insn_n_dups[recog_memoized (insn)] > 0)
5911 validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), new, 1);
5912 else
5913 SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = new;
5914
5915 if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT || GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
5916 {
5917 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 1),
5918 canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 1), insn), 1);
5919 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 2),
5920 canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 2), insn), 1);
5921 }
5922
5923 while (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
5924 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
5925 || GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
5926 dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
5927
5928 if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
5929 canon_reg (dest, insn);
5930 }
5931
5932 /* Now that we have done all the replacements, we can apply the change
5933 group and see if they all work. Note that this will cause some
5934 canonicalizations that would have worked individually not to be applied
5935 because some other canonicalization didn't work, but this should not
5936 occur often.
5937
5938 The result of apply_change_group can be ignored; see canon_reg. */
5939
5940 apply_change_group ();
5941
5942 /* Set sets[i].src_elt to the class each source belongs to.
5943 Detect assignments from or to volatile things
5944 and set set[i] to zero so they will be ignored
5945 in the rest of this function.
5946
5947 Nothing in this loop changes the hash table or the register chains. */
5948
5949 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
5950 {
5951 register rtx src, dest;
5952 register rtx src_folded;
5953 register struct table_elt *elt = 0, *p;
5954 enum machine_mode mode;
5955 rtx src_eqv_here;
5956 rtx src_const = 0;
5957 rtx src_related = 0;
5958 struct table_elt *src_const_elt = 0;
5959 int src_cost = 10000, src_eqv_cost = 10000, src_folded_cost = 10000;
5960 int src_related_cost = 10000, src_elt_cost = 10000;
5961 /* Set non-zero if we need to call force_const_mem on with the
5962 contents of src_folded before using it. */
5963 int src_folded_force_flag = 0;
5964
5965 dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
5966 src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
5967
5968 /* If SRC is a constant that has no machine mode,
5969 hash it with the destination's machine mode.
5970 This way we can keep different modes separate. */
5971
5972 mode = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
5973 sets[i].mode = mode;
5974
5975 if (src_eqv)
5976 {
5977 enum machine_mode eqvmode = mode;
5978 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
5979 eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
5980 do_not_record = 0;
5981 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5982 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
5983 src_eqv = fold_rtx (src_eqv, insn);
5984 src_eqv_hash_code = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
5985
5986 /* Find the equivalence class for the equivalent expression. */
5987
5988 if (!do_not_record)
5989 src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash_code, eqvmode);
5990
5991 src_eqv_volatile = do_not_record;
5992 src_eqv_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5993 src_eqv_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
5994 }
5995
5996 /* If this is a STRICT_LOW_PART assignment, src_eqv corresponds to the
5997 value of the INNER register, not the destination. So it is not
5998 a legal substitution for the source. But save it for later. */
5999 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6000 src_eqv_here = 0;
6001 else
6002 src_eqv_here = src_eqv;
6003
6004 /* Simplify and foldable subexpressions in SRC. Then get the fully-
6005 simplified result, which may not necessarily be valid. */
6006 src_folded = fold_rtx (src, insn);
6007
6008 /* If storing a constant in a bitfield, pre-truncate the constant
6009 so we will be able to record it later. */
6010 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
6011 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
6012 {
6013 rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
6014
6015 if (GET_CODE (src) == CONST_INT
6016 && GET_CODE (width) == CONST_INT
6017 && INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
6018 && (INTVAL (src) & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << INTVAL (width))))
6019 src_folded
6020 = GEN_INT (INTVAL (src) & (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
6021 << INTVAL (width)) - 1));
6022 }
6023
6024 /* Compute SRC's hash code, and also notice if it
6025 should not be recorded at all. In that case,
6026 prevent any further processing of this assignment. */
6027 do_not_record = 0;
6028 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
6029 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
6030
6031 sets[i].src = src;
6032 sets[i].src_hash_code = HASH (src, mode);
6033 sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
6034 sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
6035 sets[i].src_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
6036
6037 #if 0
6038 /* It is no longer clear why we used to do this, but it doesn't
6039 appear to still be needed. So let's try without it since this
6040 code hurts cse'ing widened ops. */
6041 /* If source is a perverse subreg (such as QI treated as an SI),
6042 treat it as volatile. It may do the work of an SI in one context
6043 where the extra bits are not being used, but cannot replace an SI
6044 in general. */
6045 if (GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG
6046 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src))
6047 > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)))))
6048 sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
6049 #endif
6050
6051 /* Locate all possible equivalent forms for SRC. Try to replace
6052 SRC in the insn with each cheaper equivalent.
6053
6054 We have the following types of equivalents: SRC itself, a folded
6055 version, a value given in a REG_EQUAL note, or a value related
6056 to a constant.
6057
6058 Each of these equivalents may be part of an additional class
6059 of equivalents (if more than one is in the table, they must be in
6060 the same class; we check for this).
6061
6062 If the source is volatile, we don't do any table lookups.
6063
6064 We note any constant equivalent for possible later use in a
6065 REG_NOTE. */
6066
6067 if (!sets[i].src_volatile)
6068 elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash_code, mode);
6069
6070 sets[i].src_elt = elt;
6071
6072 if (elt && src_eqv_here && src_eqv_elt)
6073 {
6074 if (elt->first_same_value != src_eqv_elt->first_same_value)
6075 {
6076 /* The REG_EQUAL is indicating that two formerly distinct
6077 classes are now equivalent. So merge them. */
6078 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_eqv_elt);
6079 src_eqv_hash_code = HASH (src_eqv, elt->mode);
6080 src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash_code, elt->mode);
6081 }
6082
6083 src_eqv_here = 0;
6084 }
6085
6086 else if (src_eqv_elt)
6087 elt = src_eqv_elt;
6088
6089 /* Try to find a constant somewhere and record it in `src_const'.
6090 Record its table element, if any, in `src_const_elt'. Look in
6091 any known equivalences first. (If the constant is not in the
6092 table, also set `sets[i].src_const_hash_code'). */
6093 if (elt)
6094 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
6095 if (p->is_const)
6096 {
6097 src_const = p->exp;
6098 src_const_elt = elt;
6099 break;
6100 }
6101
6102 if (src_const == 0
6103 && (CONSTANT_P (src_folded)
6104 /* Consider (minus (label_ref L1) (label_ref L2)) as
6105 "constant" here so we will record it. This allows us
6106 to fold switch statements when an ADDR_DIFF_VEC is used. */
6107 || (GET_CODE (src_folded) == MINUS
6108 && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 0)) == LABEL_REF
6109 && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 1)) == LABEL_REF)))
6110 src_const = src_folded, src_const_elt = elt;
6111 else if (src_const == 0 && src_eqv_here && CONSTANT_P (src_eqv_here))
6112 src_const = src_eqv_here, src_const_elt = src_eqv_elt;
6113
6114 /* If we don't know if the constant is in the table, get its
6115 hash code and look it up. */
6116 if (src_const && src_const_elt == 0)
6117 {
6118 sets[i].src_const_hash_code = HASH (src_const, mode);
6119 src_const_elt = lookup (src_const, sets[i].src_const_hash_code,
6120 mode);
6121 }
6122
6123 sets[i].src_const = src_const;
6124 sets[i].src_const_elt = src_const_elt;
6125
6126 /* If the constant and our source are both in the table, mark them as
6127 equivalent. Otherwise, if a constant is in the table but the source
6128 isn't, set ELT to it. */
6129 if (src_const_elt && elt
6130 && src_const_elt->first_same_value != elt->first_same_value)
6131 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_const_elt);
6132 else if (src_const_elt && elt == 0)
6133 elt = src_const_elt;
6134
6135 /* See if there is a register linearly related to a constant
6136 equivalent of SRC. */
6137 if (src_const
6138 && (GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST
6139 || (src_const_elt && src_const_elt->related_value != 0)))
6140 {
6141 src_related = use_related_value (src_const, src_const_elt);
6142 if (src_related)
6143 {
6144 struct table_elt *src_related_elt
6145 = lookup (src_related, HASH (src_related, mode), mode);
6146 if (src_related_elt && elt)
6147 {
6148 if (elt->first_same_value
6149 != src_related_elt->first_same_value)
6150 /* This can occur when we previously saw a CONST
6151 involving a SYMBOL_REF and then see the SYMBOL_REF
6152 twice. Merge the involved classes. */
6153 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_related_elt);
6154
6155 src_related = 0;
6156 src_related_elt = 0;
6157 }
6158 else if (src_related_elt && elt == 0)
6159 elt = src_related_elt;
6160 }
6161 }
6162
6163 /* See if we have a CONST_INT that is already in a register in a
6164 wider mode. */
6165
6166 if (src_const && src_related == 0 && GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST_INT
6167 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6168 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) < BITS_PER_WORD)
6169 {
6170 enum machine_mode wider_mode;
6171
6172 for (wider_mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode);
6173 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wider_mode) <= BITS_PER_WORD
6174 && src_related == 0;
6175 wider_mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (wider_mode))
6176 {
6177 struct table_elt *const_elt
6178 = lookup (src_const, HASH (src_const, wider_mode), wider_mode);
6179
6180 if (const_elt == 0)
6181 continue;
6182
6183 for (const_elt = const_elt->first_same_value;
6184 const_elt; const_elt = const_elt->next_same_value)
6185 if (GET_CODE (const_elt->exp) == REG)
6186 {
6187 src_related = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode,
6188 const_elt->exp);
6189 break;
6190 }
6191 }
6192 }
6193
6194 /* Another possibility is that we have an AND with a constant in
6195 a mode narrower than a word. If so, it might have been generated
6196 as part of an "if" which would narrow the AND. If we already
6197 have done the AND in a wider mode, we can use a SUBREG of that
6198 value. */
6199
6200 if (flag_expensive_optimizations && ! src_related
6201 && GET_CODE (src) == AND && GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 1)) == CONST_INT
6202 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD)
6203 {
6204 enum machine_mode tmode;
6205 rtx new_and = gen_rtx (AND, VOIDmode, NULL_RTX, XEXP (src, 1));
6206
6207 for (tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode);
6208 GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD;
6209 tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
6210 {
6211 rtx inner = gen_lowpart_if_possible (tmode, XEXP (src, 0));
6212 struct table_elt *larger_elt;
6213
6214 if (inner)
6215 {
6216 PUT_MODE (new_and, tmode);
6217 XEXP (new_and, 0) = inner;
6218 larger_elt = lookup (new_and, HASH (new_and, tmode), tmode);
6219 if (larger_elt == 0)
6220 continue;
6221
6222 for (larger_elt = larger_elt->first_same_value;
6223 larger_elt; larger_elt = larger_elt->next_same_value)
6224 if (GET_CODE (larger_elt->exp) == REG)
6225 {
6226 src_related
6227 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, larger_elt->exp);
6228 break;
6229 }
6230
6231 if (src_related)
6232 break;
6233 }
6234 }
6235 }
6236
6237 if (src == src_folded)
6238 src_folded = 0;
6239
6240 /* At this point, ELT, if non-zero, points to a class of expressions
6241 equivalent to the source of this SET and SRC, SRC_EQV, SRC_FOLDED,
6242 and SRC_RELATED, if non-zero, each contain additional equivalent
6243 expressions. Prune these latter expressions by deleting expressions
6244 already in the equivalence class.
6245
6246 Check for an equivalent identical to the destination. If found,
6247 this is the preferred equivalent since it will likely lead to
6248 elimination of the insn. Indicate this by placing it in
6249 `src_related'. */
6250
6251 if (elt) elt = elt->first_same_value;
6252 for (p = elt; p; p = p->next_same_value)
6253 {
6254 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (p->exp);
6255
6256 /* If the expression is not valid, ignore it. Then we do not
6257 have to check for validity below. In most cases, we can use
6258 `rtx_equal_p', since canonicalization has already been done. */
6259 if (code != REG && ! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
6260 continue;
6261
6262 if (src && GET_CODE (src) == code && rtx_equal_p (src, p->exp))
6263 src = 0;
6264 else if (src_folded && GET_CODE (src_folded) == code
6265 && rtx_equal_p (src_folded, p->exp))
6266 src_folded = 0;
6267 else if (src_eqv_here && GET_CODE (src_eqv_here) == code
6268 && rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, p->exp))
6269 src_eqv_here = 0;
6270 else if (src_related && GET_CODE (src_related) == code
6271 && rtx_equal_p (src_related, p->exp))
6272 src_related = 0;
6273
6274 /* This is the same as the destination of the insns, we want
6275 to prefer it. Copy it to src_related. The code below will
6276 then give it a negative cost. */
6277 if (GET_CODE (dest) == code && rtx_equal_p (p->exp, dest))
6278 src_related = dest;
6279
6280 }
6281
6282 /* Find the cheapest valid equivalent, trying all the available
6283 possibilities. Prefer items not in the hash table to ones
6284 that are when they are equal cost. Note that we can never
6285 worsen an insn as the current contents will also succeed.
6286 If we find an equivalent identical to the destination, use it as best,
6287 since this insn will probably be eliminated in that case. */
6288 if (src)
6289 {
6290 if (rtx_equal_p (src, dest))
6291 src_cost = -1;
6292 else
6293 src_cost = COST (src);
6294 }
6295
6296 if (src_eqv_here)
6297 {
6298 if (rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, dest))
6299 src_eqv_cost = -1;
6300 else
6301 src_eqv_cost = COST (src_eqv_here);
6302 }
6303
6304 if (src_folded)
6305 {
6306 if (rtx_equal_p (src_folded, dest))
6307 src_folded_cost = -1;
6308 else
6309 src_folded_cost = COST (src_folded);
6310 }
6311
6312 if (src_related)
6313 {
6314 if (rtx_equal_p (src_related, dest))
6315 src_related_cost = -1;
6316 else
6317 src_related_cost = COST (src_related);
6318 }
6319
6320 /* If this was an indirect jump insn, a known label will really be
6321 cheaper even though it looks more expensive. */
6322 if (dest == pc_rtx && src_const && GET_CODE (src_const) == LABEL_REF)
6323 src_folded = src_const, src_folded_cost = -1;
6324
6325 /* Terminate loop when replacement made. This must terminate since
6326 the current contents will be tested and will always be valid. */
6327 while (1)
6328 {
6329 rtx trial;
6330
6331 /* Skip invalid entries. */
6332 while (elt && GET_CODE (elt->exp) != REG
6333 && ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
6334 elt = elt->next_same_value;
6335
6336 if (elt) src_elt_cost = elt->cost;
6337
6338 /* Find cheapest and skip it for the next time. For items
6339 of equal cost, use this order:
6340 src_folded, src, src_eqv, src_related and hash table entry. */
6341 if (src_folded_cost <= src_cost
6342 && src_folded_cost <= src_eqv_cost
6343 && src_folded_cost <= src_related_cost
6344 && src_folded_cost <= src_elt_cost)
6345 {
6346 trial = src_folded, src_folded_cost = 10000;
6347 if (src_folded_force_flag)
6348 trial = force_const_mem (mode, trial);
6349 }
6350 else if (src_cost <= src_eqv_cost
6351 && src_cost <= src_related_cost
6352 && src_cost <= src_elt_cost)
6353 trial = src, src_cost = 10000;
6354 else if (src_eqv_cost <= src_related_cost
6355 && src_eqv_cost <= src_elt_cost)
6356 trial = src_eqv_here, src_eqv_cost = 10000;
6357 else if (src_related_cost <= src_elt_cost)
6358 trial = src_related, src_related_cost = 10000;
6359 else
6360 {
6361 trial = copy_rtx (elt->exp);
6362 elt = elt->next_same_value;
6363 src_elt_cost = 10000;
6364 }
6365
6366 /* We don't normally have an insn matching (set (pc) (pc)), so
6367 check for this separately here. We will delete such an
6368 insn below.
6369
6370 Tablejump insns contain a USE of the table, so simply replacing
6371 the operand with the constant won't match. This is simply an
6372 unconditional branch, however, and is therefore valid. Just
6373 insert the substitution here and we will delete and re-emit
6374 the insn later. */
6375
6376 if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx
6377 && (trial == pc_rtx
6378 || (GET_CODE (trial) == LABEL_REF
6379 && ! condjump_p (insn))))
6380 {
6381 /* If TRIAL is a label in front of a jump table, we are
6382 really falling through the switch (this is how casesi
6383 insns work), so we must branch around the table. */
6384 if (GET_CODE (trial) == CODE_LABEL
6385 && NEXT_INSN (trial) != 0
6386 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (trial)) == JUMP_INSN
6387 && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (trial))) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC
6388 || GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (trial))) == ADDR_VEC))
6389
6390 trial = gen_rtx (LABEL_REF, Pmode, get_label_after (trial));
6391
6392 SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = trial;
6393 break;
6394 }
6395
6396 /* Look for a substitution that makes a valid insn. */
6397 else if (validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), trial, 0))
6398 {
6399 /* The result of apply_change_group can be ignored; see
6400 canon_reg. */
6401
6402 validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl),
6403 canon_reg (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), insn),
6404 1);
6405 apply_change_group ();
6406 break;
6407 }
6408
6409 /* If we previously found constant pool entries for
6410 constants and this is a constant, try making a
6411 pool entry. Put it in src_folded unless we already have done
6412 this since that is where it likely came from. */
6413
6414 else if (constant_pool_entries_cost
6415 && CONSTANT_P (trial)
6416 && (src_folded == 0 || GET_CODE (src_folded) != MEM)
6417 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC)
6418 {
6419 src_folded_force_flag = 1;
6420 src_folded = trial;
6421 src_folded_cost = constant_pool_entries_cost;
6422 }
6423 }
6424
6425 src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
6426
6427 /* In general, it is good to have a SET with SET_SRC == SET_DEST.
6428 However, there is an important exception: If both are registers
6429 that are not the head of their equivalence class, replace SET_SRC
6430 with the head of the class. If we do not do this, we will have
6431 both registers live over a portion of the basic block. This way,
6432 their lifetimes will likely abut instead of overlapping. */
6433 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG
6434 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (dest))
6435 && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] == GET_MODE (dest)
6436 && qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] != REGNO (dest)
6437 && GET_CODE (src) == REG && REGNO (src) == REGNO (dest)
6438 /* Don't do this if the original insn had a hard reg as
6439 SET_SRC. */
6440 && (GET_CODE (sets[i].src) != REG
6441 || REGNO (sets[i].src) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
6442 /* We can't call canon_reg here because it won't do anything if
6443 SRC is a hard register. */
6444 {
6445 int first = qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (src)]];
6446
6447 src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl)
6448 = first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? regno_reg_rtx[first]
6449 : gen_rtx (REG, GET_MODE (src), first);
6450
6451 /* If we had a constant that is cheaper than what we are now
6452 setting SRC to, use that constant. We ignored it when we
6453 thought we could make this into a no-op. */
6454 if (src_const && COST (src_const) < COST (src)
6455 && validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), src_const, 0))
6456 src = src_const;
6457 }
6458
6459 /* If we made a change, recompute SRC values. */
6460 if (src != sets[i].src)
6461 {
6462 do_not_record = 0;
6463 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
6464 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
6465 sets[i].src = src;
6466 sets[i].src_hash_code = HASH (src, mode);
6467 sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
6468 sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
6469 sets[i].src_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
6470 sets[i].src_elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash_code, mode);
6471 }
6472
6473 /* If this is a single SET, we are setting a register, and we have an
6474 equivalent constant, we want to add a REG_NOTE. We don't want
6475 to write a REG_EQUAL note for a constant pseudo since verifying that
6476 that pseudo hasn't been eliminated is a pain. Such a note also
6477 won't help anything. */
6478 if (n_sets == 1 && src_const && GET_CODE (dest) == REG
6479 && GET_CODE (src_const) != REG)
6480 {
6481 rtx tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX);
6482
6483 /* Record the actual constant value in a REG_EQUAL note, making
6484 a new one if one does not already exist. */
6485 if (tem)
6486 XEXP (tem, 0) = src_const;
6487 else
6488 REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx (EXPR_LIST, REG_EQUAL,
6489 src_const, REG_NOTES (insn));
6490
6491 /* If storing a constant value in a register that
6492 previously held the constant value 0,
6493 record this fact with a REG_WAS_0 note on this insn.
6494
6495 Note that the *register* is required to have previously held 0,
6496 not just any register in the quantity and we must point to the
6497 insn that set that register to zero.
6498
6499 Rather than track each register individually, we just see if
6500 the last set for this quantity was for this register. */
6501
6502 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (dest))
6503 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] == const0_rtx)
6504 {
6505 /* See if we previously had a REG_WAS_0 note. */
6506 rtx note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_WAS_0, NULL_RTX);
6507 rtx const_insn = qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]];
6508
6509 if ((tem = single_set (const_insn)) != 0
6510 && rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (tem), dest))
6511 {
6512 if (note)
6513 XEXP (note, 0) = const_insn;
6514 else
6515 REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx (INSN_LIST, REG_WAS_0,
6516 const_insn, REG_NOTES (insn));
6517 }
6518 }
6519 }
6520
6521 /* Now deal with the destination. */
6522 do_not_record = 0;
6523 sets[i].inner_dest_loc = &SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
6524
6525 /* Look within any SIGN_EXTRACT or ZERO_EXTRACT
6526 to the MEM or REG within it. */
6527 while (GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT
6528 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
6529 || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6530 || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6531 {
6532 sets[i].inner_dest_loc = &XEXP (dest, 0);
6533 dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
6534 }
6535
6536 sets[i].inner_dest = dest;
6537
6538 if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
6539 {
6540 dest = fold_rtx (dest, insn);
6541
6542 /* Decide whether we invalidate everything in memory,
6543 or just things at non-fixed places.
6544 Writing a large aggregate must invalidate everything
6545 because we don't know how long it is. */
6546 note_mem_written (dest, &writes_memory);
6547 }
6548
6549 /* Compute the hash code of the destination now,
6550 before the effects of this instruction are recorded,
6551 since the register values used in the address computation
6552 are those before this instruction. */
6553 sets[i].dest_hash_code = HASH (dest, mode);
6554
6555 /* Don't enter a bit-field in the hash table
6556 because the value in it after the store
6557 may not equal what was stored, due to truncation. */
6558
6559 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
6560 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
6561 {
6562 rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
6563
6564 if (src_const != 0 && GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST_INT
6565 && GET_CODE (width) == CONST_INT
6566 && INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
6567 && ! (INTVAL (src_const)
6568 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << INTVAL (width))))
6569 /* Exception: if the value is constant,
6570 and it won't be truncated, record it. */
6571 ;
6572 else
6573 {
6574 /* This is chosen so that the destination will be invalidated
6575 but no new value will be recorded.
6576 We must invalidate because sometimes constant
6577 values can be recorded for bitfields. */
6578 sets[i].src_elt = 0;
6579 sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
6580 src_eqv = 0;
6581 src_eqv_elt = 0;
6582 }
6583 }
6584
6585 /* If only one set in a JUMP_INSN and it is now a no-op, we can delete
6586 the insn. */
6587 else if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx && src == pc_rtx)
6588 {
6589 PUT_CODE (insn, NOTE);
6590 NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED;
6591 NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (insn) = 0;
6592 cse_jumps_altered = 1;
6593 /* One less use of the label this insn used to jump to. */
6594 --LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (insn));
6595 /* No more processing for this set. */
6596 sets[i].rtl = 0;
6597 }
6598
6599 /* If this SET is now setting PC to a label, we know it used to
6600 be a conditional or computed branch. So we see if we can follow
6601 it. If it was a computed branch, delete it and re-emit. */
6602 else if (dest == pc_rtx && GET_CODE (src) == LABEL_REF)
6603 {
6604 rtx p;
6605
6606 /* If this is not in the format for a simple branch and
6607 we are the only SET in it, re-emit it. */
6608 if (! simplejump_p (insn) && n_sets == 1)
6609 {
6610 rtx new = emit_jump_insn_before (gen_jump (XEXP (src, 0)), insn);
6611 JUMP_LABEL (new) = XEXP (src, 0);
6612 LABEL_NUSES (XEXP (src, 0))++;
6613 delete_insn (insn);
6614 insn = new;
6615 }
6616 else
6617 /* Otherwise, force rerecognition, since it probably had
6618 a different pattern before.
6619 This shouldn't really be necessary, since whatever
6620 changed the source value above should have done this.
6621 Until the right place is found, might as well do this here. */
6622 INSN_CODE (insn) = -1;
6623
6624 /* Now that we've converted this jump to an unconditional jump,
6625 there is dead code after it. Delete the dead code until we
6626 reach a BARRIER, the end of the function, or a label. Do
6627 not delete NOTEs except for NOTE_INSN_DELETED since later
6628 phases assume these notes are retained. */
6629
6630 p = insn;
6631
6632 while (NEXT_INSN (p) != 0
6633 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != BARRIER
6634 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != CODE_LABEL)
6635 {
6636 if (GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != NOTE
6637 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (NEXT_INSN (p)) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED)
6638 delete_insn (NEXT_INSN (p));
6639 else
6640 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
6641 }
6642
6643 /* If we don't have a BARRIER immediately after INSN, put one there.
6644 Much code assumes that there are no NOTEs between a JUMP_INSN and
6645 BARRIER. */
6646
6647 if (NEXT_INSN (insn) == 0
6648 || GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (insn)) != BARRIER)
6649 emit_barrier_after (insn);
6650
6651 /* We might have two BARRIERs separated by notes. Delete the second
6652 one if so. */
6653
6654 if (p != insn && NEXT_INSN (p) != 0
6655 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) == BARRIER)
6656 delete_insn (NEXT_INSN (p));
6657
6658 cse_jumps_altered = 1;
6659 sets[i].rtl = 0;
6660 }
6661
6662 /* If destination is volatile, invalidate it and then do no further
6663 processing for this assignment. */
6664
6665 else if (do_not_record)
6666 {
6667 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6668 || GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
6669 invalidate (dest);
6670 sets[i].rtl = 0;
6671 }
6672
6673 if (sets[i].rtl != 0 && dest != SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl))
6674 sets[i].dest_hash_code = HASH (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), mode);
6675
6676 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
6677 /* If setting CC0, record what it was set to, or a constant, if it
6678 is equivalent to a constant. If it is being set to a floating-point
6679 value, make a COMPARE with the appropriate constant of 0. If we
6680 don't do this, later code can interpret this as a test against
6681 const0_rtx, which can cause problems if we try to put it into an
6682 insn as a floating-point operand. */
6683 if (dest == cc0_rtx)
6684 {
6685 this_insn_cc0 = src_const && mode != VOIDmode ? src_const : src;
6686 this_insn_cc0_mode = mode;
6687 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
6688 this_insn_cc0 = gen_rtx (COMPARE, VOIDmode, this_insn_cc0,
6689 CONST0_RTX (mode));
6690 }
6691 #endif
6692 }
6693
6694 /* Now enter all non-volatile source expressions in the hash table
6695 if they are not already present.
6696 Record their equivalence classes in src_elt.
6697 This way we can insert the corresponding destinations into
6698 the same classes even if the actual sources are no longer in them
6699 (having been invalidated). */
6700
6701 if (src_eqv && src_eqv_elt == 0 && sets[0].rtl != 0 && ! src_eqv_volatile
6702 && ! rtx_equal_p (src_eqv, SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)))
6703 {
6704 register struct table_elt *elt;
6705 register struct table_elt *classp = sets[0].src_elt;
6706 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
6707 enum machine_mode eqvmode = GET_MODE (dest);
6708
6709 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6710 {
6711 eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
6712 classp = 0;
6713 }
6714 if (insert_regs (src_eqv, classp, 0))
6715 src_eqv_hash_code = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
6716 elt = insert (src_eqv, classp, src_eqv_hash_code, eqvmode);
6717 elt->in_memory = src_eqv_in_memory;
6718 elt->in_struct = src_eqv_in_struct;
6719 src_eqv_elt = elt;
6720 }
6721
6722 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6723 if (sets[i].rtl && ! sets[i].src_volatile
6724 && ! rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)))
6725 {
6726 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6727 {
6728 /* REG_EQUAL in setting a STRICT_LOW_PART
6729 gives an equivalent for the entire destination register,
6730 not just for the subreg being stored in now.
6731 This is a more interesting equivalence, so we arrange later
6732 to treat the entire reg as the destination. */
6733 sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
6734 sets[i].src_hash_code = src_eqv_hash_code;
6735 }
6736 else
6737 {
6738 /* Insert source and constant equivalent into hash table, if not
6739 already present. */
6740 register struct table_elt *classp = src_eqv_elt;
6741 register rtx src = sets[i].src;
6742 register rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
6743 enum machine_mode mode
6744 = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
6745
6746 if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
6747 {
6748 register struct table_elt *elt;
6749
6750 /* Note that these insert_regs calls cannot remove
6751 any of the src_elt's, because they would have failed to
6752 match if not still valid. */
6753 if (insert_regs (src, classp, 0))
6754 sets[i].src_hash_code = HASH (src, mode);
6755 elt = insert (src, classp, sets[i].src_hash_code, mode);
6756 elt->in_memory = sets[i].src_in_memory;
6757 elt->in_struct = sets[i].src_in_struct;
6758 sets[i].src_elt = classp = elt;
6759 }
6760
6761 if (sets[i].src_const && sets[i].src_const_elt == 0
6762 && src != sets[i].src_const
6763 && ! rtx_equal_p (sets[i].src_const, src))
6764 sets[i].src_elt = insert (sets[i].src_const, classp,
6765 sets[i].src_const_hash_code, mode);
6766 }
6767 }
6768 else if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
6769 /* If we did not insert the source into the hash table (e.g., it was
6770 volatile), note the equivalence class for the REG_EQUAL value, if any,
6771 so that the destination goes into that class. */
6772 sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
6773
6774 invalidate_from_clobbers (&writes_memory, x);
6775
6776 /* Some registers are invalidated by subroutine calls. Memory is
6777 invalidated by non-constant calls. */
6778
6779 if (GET_CODE (insn) == CALL_INSN)
6780 {
6781 static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
6782
6783 if (! CONST_CALL_P (insn))
6784 invalidate_memory (&everything);
6785 invalidate_for_call ();
6786 }
6787
6788 /* Now invalidate everything set by this instruction.
6789 If a SUBREG or other funny destination is being set,
6790 sets[i].rtl is still nonzero, so here we invalidate the reg
6791 a part of which is being set. */
6792
6793 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6794 if (sets[i].rtl)
6795 {
6796 register rtx dest = sets[i].inner_dest;
6797
6798 /* Needed for registers to remove the register from its
6799 previous quantity's chain.
6800 Needed for memory if this is a nonvarying address, unless
6801 we have just done an invalidate_memory that covers even those. */
6802 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6803 || (! writes_memory.all && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (dest)))
6804 invalidate (dest);
6805 }
6806
6807 /* Make sure registers mentioned in destinations
6808 are safe for use in an expression to be inserted.
6809 This removes from the hash table
6810 any invalid entry that refers to one of these registers.
6811
6812 We don't care about the return value from mention_regs because
6813 we are going to hash the SET_DEST values unconditionally. */
6814
6815 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6816 if (sets[i].rtl && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) != REG)
6817 mention_regs (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl));
6818
6819 /* We may have just removed some of the src_elt's from the hash table.
6820 So replace each one with the current head of the same class. */
6821
6822 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6823 if (sets[i].rtl)
6824 {
6825 if (sets[i].src_elt && sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value == 0)
6826 /* If elt was removed, find current head of same class,
6827 or 0 if nothing remains of that class. */
6828 {
6829 register struct table_elt *elt = sets[i].src_elt;
6830
6831 while (elt && elt->prev_same_value)
6832 elt = elt->prev_same_value;
6833
6834 while (elt && elt->first_same_value == 0)
6835 elt = elt->next_same_value;
6836 sets[i].src_elt = elt ? elt->first_same_value : 0;
6837 }
6838 }
6839
6840 /* Now insert the destinations into their equivalence classes. */
6841
6842 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6843 if (sets[i].rtl)
6844 {
6845 register rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
6846 register struct table_elt *elt;
6847
6848 /* Don't record value if we are not supposed to risk allocating
6849 floating-point values in registers that might be wider than
6850 memory. */
6851 if ((flag_float_store
6852 && GET_CODE (dest) == MEM
6853 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (dest)) == MODE_FLOAT)
6854 /* Don't record values of destinations set inside a libcall block
6855 since we might delete the libcall. Things should have been set
6856 up so we won't want to reuse such a value, but we play it safe
6857 here. */
6858 || in_libcall_block
6859 /* If we didn't put a REG_EQUAL value or a source into the hash
6860 table, there is no point is recording DEST. */
6861 || sets[i].src_elt == 0)
6862 continue;
6863
6864 /* STRICT_LOW_PART isn't part of the value BEING set,
6865 and neither is the SUBREG inside it.
6866 Note that in this case SETS[I].SRC_ELT is really SRC_EQV_ELT. */
6867 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6868 dest = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0));
6869
6870 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG)
6871 /* Registers must also be inserted into chains for quantities. */
6872 if (insert_regs (dest, sets[i].src_elt, 1))
6873 /* If `insert_regs' changes something, the hash code must be
6874 recalculated. */
6875 sets[i].dest_hash_code = HASH (dest, GET_MODE (dest));
6876
6877 elt = insert (dest, sets[i].src_elt,
6878 sets[i].dest_hash_code, GET_MODE (dest));
6879 elt->in_memory = GET_CODE (sets[i].inner_dest) == MEM;
6880 if (elt->in_memory)
6881 {
6882 /* This implicitly assumes a whole struct
6883 need not have MEM_IN_STRUCT_P.
6884 But a whole struct is *supposed* to have MEM_IN_STRUCT_P. */
6885 elt->in_struct = (MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (sets[i].inner_dest)
6886 || sets[i].inner_dest != SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl));
6887 }
6888
6889 /* If we have (set (subreg:m1 (reg:m2 foo) 0) (bar:m1)), M1 is no
6890 narrower than M2, and both M1 and M2 are the same number of words,
6891 we are also doing (set (reg:m2 foo) (subreg:m2 (bar:m1) 0)) so
6892 make that equivalence as well.
6893
6894 However, BAR may have equivalences for which gen_lowpart_if_possible
6895 will produce a simpler value than gen_lowpart_if_possible applied to
6896 BAR (e.g., if BAR was ZERO_EXTENDed from M2), so we will scan all
6897 BAR's equivalences. If we don't get a simplified form, make
6898 the SUBREG. It will not be used in an equivalence, but will
6899 cause two similar assignments to be detected.
6900
6901 Note the loop below will find SUBREG_REG (DEST) since we have
6902 already entered SRC and DEST of the SET in the table. */
6903
6904 if (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6905 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))) / UNITS_PER_WORD
6906 == GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest)) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
6907 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest))
6908 >= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))))
6909 && sets[i].src_elt != 0)
6910 {
6911 enum machine_mode new_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest));
6912 struct table_elt *elt, *classp = 0;
6913
6914 for (elt = sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value; elt;
6915 elt = elt->next_same_value)
6916 {
6917 rtx new_src = 0;
6918 int src_hash;
6919 struct table_elt *src_elt;
6920
6921 /* Ignore invalid entries. */
6922 if (GET_CODE (elt->exp) != REG
6923 && ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
6924 continue;
6925
6926 new_src = gen_lowpart_if_possible (new_mode, elt->exp);
6927 if (new_src == 0)
6928 new_src = gen_rtx (SUBREG, new_mode, elt->exp, 0);
6929
6930 src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
6931 src_elt = lookup (new_src, src_hash, new_mode);
6932
6933 /* Put the new source in the hash table is if isn't
6934 already. */
6935 if (src_elt == 0)
6936 {
6937 if (insert_regs (new_src, classp, 0))
6938 src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
6939 src_elt = insert (new_src, classp, src_hash, new_mode);
6940 src_elt->in_memory = elt->in_memory;
6941 src_elt->in_struct = elt->in_struct;
6942 }
6943 else if (classp && classp != src_elt->first_same_value)
6944 /* Show that two things that we've seen before are
6945 actually the same. */
6946 merge_equiv_classes (src_elt, classp);
6947
6948 classp = src_elt->first_same_value;
6949 }
6950 }
6951 }
6952
6953 /* Special handling for (set REG0 REG1)
6954 where REG0 is the "cheapest", cheaper than REG1.
6955 After cse, REG1 will probably not be used in the sequel,
6956 so (if easily done) change this insn to (set REG1 REG0) and
6957 replace REG1 with REG0 in the previous insn that computed their value.
6958 Then REG1 will become a dead store and won't cloud the situation
6959 for later optimizations.
6960
6961 Do not make this change if REG1 is a hard register, because it will
6962 then be used in the sequel and we may be changing a two-operand insn
6963 into a three-operand insn.
6964
6965 Also do not do this if we are operating on a copy of INSN. */
6966
6967 if (n_sets == 1 && sets[0].rtl && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)) == REG
6968 && NEXT_INSN (PREV_INSN (insn)) == insn
6969 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)) == REG
6970 && REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6971 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)))
6972 && (qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))]]
6973 == REGNO (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl))))
6974 {
6975 rtx prev = PREV_INSN (insn);
6976 while (prev && GET_CODE (prev) == NOTE)
6977 prev = PREV_INSN (prev);
6978
6979 if (prev && GET_CODE (prev) == INSN && GET_CODE (PATTERN (prev)) == SET
6980 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)) == SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))
6981 {
6982 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
6983 rtx note = find_reg_note (prev, REG_EQUIV, NULL_RTX);
6984
6985 validate_change (prev, & SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)), dest, 1);
6986 validate_change (insn, & SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl),
6987 SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl), 1);
6988 validate_change (insn, & SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl), dest, 1);
6989 apply_change_group ();
6990
6991 /* If REG1 was equivalent to a constant, REG0 is not. */
6992 if (note)
6993 PUT_REG_NOTE_KIND (note, REG_EQUAL);
6994
6995 /* If there was a REG_WAS_0 note on PREV, remove it. Move
6996 any REG_WAS_0 note on INSN to PREV. */
6997 note = find_reg_note (prev, REG_WAS_0, NULL_RTX);
6998 if (note)
6999 remove_note (prev, note);
7000
7001 note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_WAS_0, NULL_RTX);
7002 if (note)
7003 {
7004 remove_note (insn, note);
7005 XEXP (note, 1) = REG_NOTES (prev);
7006 REG_NOTES (prev) = note;
7007 }
7008 }
7009 }
7010
7011 /* If this is a conditional jump insn, record any known equivalences due to
7012 the condition being tested. */
7013
7014 last_jump_equiv_class = 0;
7015 if (GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN
7016 && n_sets == 1 && GET_CODE (x) == SET
7017 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == IF_THEN_ELSE)
7018 record_jump_equiv (insn, 0);
7019
7020 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
7021 /* If the previous insn set CC0 and this insn no longer references CC0,
7022 delete the previous insn. Here we use the fact that nothing expects CC0
7023 to be valid over an insn, which is true until the final pass. */
7024 if (prev_insn && GET_CODE (prev_insn) == INSN
7025 && (tem = single_set (prev_insn)) != 0
7026 && SET_DEST (tem) == cc0_rtx
7027 && ! reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx, x))
7028 {
7029 PUT_CODE (prev_insn, NOTE);
7030 NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (prev_insn) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED;
7031 NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (prev_insn) = 0;
7032 }
7033
7034 prev_insn_cc0 = this_insn_cc0;
7035 prev_insn_cc0_mode = this_insn_cc0_mode;
7036 #endif
7037
7038 prev_insn = insn;
7039 }
7040 \f
7041 /* Store 1 in *WRITES_PTR for those categories of memory ref
7042 that must be invalidated when the expression WRITTEN is stored in.
7043 If WRITTEN is null, say everything must be invalidated. */
7044
7045 static void
7046 note_mem_written (written, writes_ptr)
7047 rtx written;
7048 struct write_data *writes_ptr;
7049 {
7050 static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
7051
7052 if (written == 0)
7053 *writes_ptr = everything;
7054 else if (GET_CODE (written) == MEM)
7055 {
7056 /* Pushing or popping the stack invalidates just the stack pointer. */
7057 rtx addr = XEXP (written, 0);
7058 if ((GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_DEC || GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_INC
7059 || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_DEC || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_INC)
7060 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG
7061 && REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0)) == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
7062 {
7063 writes_ptr->sp = 1;
7064 return;
7065 }
7066 else if (GET_MODE (written) == BLKmode)
7067 *writes_ptr = everything;
7068 else if (cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (written))
7069 {
7070 /* A varying address that is a sum indicates an array element,
7071 and that's just as good as a structure element
7072 in implying that we need not invalidate scalar variables.
7073 However, we must allow QImode aliasing of scalars, because the
7074 ANSI C standard allows character pointers to alias anything. */
7075 if (! ((MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (written)
7076 || GET_CODE (XEXP (written, 0)) == PLUS)
7077 && GET_MODE (written) != QImode))
7078 writes_ptr->all = 1;
7079 writes_ptr->nonscalar = 1;
7080 }
7081 writes_ptr->var = 1;
7082 }
7083 }
7084
7085 /* Perform invalidation on the basis of everything about an insn
7086 except for invalidating the actual places that are SET in it.
7087 This includes the places CLOBBERed, and anything that might
7088 alias with something that is SET or CLOBBERed.
7089
7090 W points to the writes_memory for this insn, a struct write_data
7091 saying which kinds of memory references must be invalidated.
7092 X is the pattern of the insn. */
7093
7094 static void
7095 invalidate_from_clobbers (w, x)
7096 struct write_data *w;
7097 rtx x;
7098 {
7099 /* If W->var is not set, W specifies no action.
7100 If W->all is set, this step gets all memory refs
7101 so they can be ignored in the rest of this function. */
7102 if (w->var)
7103 invalidate_memory (w);
7104
7105 if (w->sp)
7106 {
7107 if (reg_tick[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM] >= 0)
7108 reg_tick[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM]++;
7109
7110 /* This should be *very* rare. */
7111 if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM))
7112 invalidate (stack_pointer_rtx);
7113 }
7114
7115 if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
7116 {
7117 rtx ref = XEXP (x, 0);
7118 if (ref
7119 && (GET_CODE (ref) == REG || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
7120 || (GET_CODE (ref) == MEM && ! w->all)))
7121 invalidate (ref);
7122 }
7123 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
7124 {
7125 register int i;
7126 for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
7127 {
7128 register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
7129 if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
7130 {
7131 rtx ref = XEXP (y, 0);
7132 if (ref
7133 &&(GET_CODE (ref) == REG || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
7134 || (GET_CODE (ref) == MEM && !w->all)))
7135 invalidate (ref);
7136 }
7137 }
7138 }
7139 }
7140 \f
7141 /* Process X, part of the REG_NOTES of an insn. Look at any REG_EQUAL notes
7142 and replace any registers in them with either an equivalent constant
7143 or the canonical form of the register. If we are inside an address,
7144 only do this if the address remains valid.
7145
7146 OBJECT is 0 except when within a MEM in which case it is the MEM.
7147
7148 Return the replacement for X. */
7149
7150 static rtx
7151 cse_process_notes (x, object)
7152 rtx x;
7153 rtx object;
7154 {
7155 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
7156 char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
7157 int qty;
7158 int i;
7159
7160 switch (code)
7161 {
7162 case CONST_INT:
7163 case CONST:
7164 case SYMBOL_REF:
7165 case LABEL_REF:
7166 case CONST_DOUBLE:
7167 case PC:
7168 case CC0:
7169 case LO_SUM:
7170 return x;
7171
7172 case MEM:
7173 XEXP (x, 0) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), x);
7174 return x;
7175
7176 case EXPR_LIST:
7177 case INSN_LIST:
7178 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) == REG_EQUAL)
7179 XEXP (x, 0) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX);
7180 if (XEXP (x, 1))
7181 XEXP (x, 1) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 1), NULL_RTX);
7182 return x;
7183
7184 case SIGN_EXTEND:
7185 case ZERO_EXTEND:
7186 {
7187 rtx new = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), object);
7188 /* We don't substitute VOIDmode constants into these rtx,
7189 since they would impede folding. */
7190 if (GET_MODE (new) != VOIDmode)
7191 validate_change (object, &XEXP (x, 0), new, 0);
7192 return x;
7193 }
7194
7195 case REG:
7196 i = reg_qty[REGNO (x)];
7197
7198 /* Return a constant or a constant register. */
7199 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
7200 && qty_const[i] != 0
7201 && (CONSTANT_P (qty_const[i])
7202 || GET_CODE (qty_const[i]) == REG))
7203 {
7204 rtx new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), qty_const[i]);
7205 if (new)
7206 return new;
7207 }
7208
7209 /* Otherwise, canonicalize this register. */
7210 return canon_reg (x, NULL_RTX);
7211 }
7212
7213 for (i = 0; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (code); i++)
7214 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
7215 validate_change (object, &XEXP (x, i),
7216 cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, i), object), 0);
7217
7218 return x;
7219 }
7220 \f
7221 /* Find common subexpressions between the end test of a loop and the beginning
7222 of the loop. LOOP_START is the CODE_LABEL at the start of a loop.
7223
7224 Often we have a loop where an expression in the exit test is used
7225 in the body of the loop. For example "while (*p) *q++ = *p++;".
7226 Because of the way we duplicate the loop exit test in front of the loop,
7227 however, we don't detect that common subexpression. This will be caught
7228 when global cse is implemented, but this is a quite common case.
7229
7230 This function handles the most common cases of these common expressions.
7231 It is called after we have processed the basic block ending with the
7232 NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END note that ends a loop and the previous JUMP_INSN
7233 jumps to a label used only once. */
7234
7235 static void
7236 cse_around_loop (loop_start)
7237 rtx loop_start;
7238 {
7239 rtx insn;
7240 int i;
7241 struct table_elt *p;
7242
7243 /* If the jump at the end of the loop doesn't go to the start, we don't
7244 do anything. */
7245 for (insn = PREV_INSN (loop_start);
7246 insn && (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) >= 0);
7247 insn = PREV_INSN (insn))
7248 ;
7249
7250 if (insn == 0
7251 || GET_CODE (insn) != NOTE
7252 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) != NOTE_INSN_LOOP_BEG)
7253 return;
7254
7255 /* If the last insn of the loop (the end test) was an NE comparison,
7256 we will interpret it as an EQ comparison, since we fell through
7257 the loop. Any equivalences resulting from that comparison are
7258 therefore not valid and must be invalidated. */
7259 if (last_jump_equiv_class)
7260 for (p = last_jump_equiv_class->first_same_value; p;
7261 p = p->next_same_value)
7262 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == MEM || GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
7263 || GET_CODE (p->exp) == SUBREG)
7264 invalidate (p->exp);
7265
7266 /* Process insns starting after LOOP_START until we hit a CALL_INSN or
7267 a CODE_LABEL (we could handle a CALL_INSN, but it isn't worth it).
7268
7269 The only thing we do with SET_DEST is invalidate entries, so we
7270 can safely process each SET in order. It is slightly less efficient
7271 to do so, but we only want to handle the most common cases. */
7272
7273 for (insn = NEXT_INSN (loop_start);
7274 GET_CODE (insn) != CALL_INSN && GET_CODE (insn) != CODE_LABEL
7275 && ! (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE
7276 && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END);
7277 insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7278 {
7279 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i'
7280 && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET
7281 || GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == CLOBBER))
7282 cse_set_around_loop (PATTERN (insn), insn, loop_start);
7283 else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i'
7284 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
7285 for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
7286 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i)) == SET
7287 || GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i)) == CLOBBER)
7288 cse_set_around_loop (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i), insn,
7289 loop_start);
7290 }
7291 }
7292 \f
7293 /* Variable used for communications between the next two routines. */
7294
7295 static struct write_data skipped_writes_memory;
7296
7297 /* Process one SET of an insn that was skipped. We ignore CLOBBERs
7298 since they are done elsewhere. This function is called via note_stores. */
7299
7300 static void
7301 invalidate_skipped_set (dest, set)
7302 rtx set;
7303 rtx dest;
7304 {
7305 if (GET_CODE (set) == CLOBBER
7306 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
7307 || dest == cc0_rtx
7308 #endif
7309 || dest == pc_rtx)
7310 return;
7311
7312 if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
7313 note_mem_written (dest, &skipped_writes_memory);
7314
7315 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
7316 || (! skipped_writes_memory.all && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (dest)))
7317 invalidate (dest);
7318 }
7319
7320 /* Invalidate all insns from START up to the end of the function or the
7321 next label. This called when we wish to CSE around a block that is
7322 conditionally executed. */
7323
7324 static void
7325 invalidate_skipped_block (start)
7326 rtx start;
7327 {
7328 rtx insn;
7329 int i;
7330 static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
7331 static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
7332
7333 for (insn = start; insn && GET_CODE (insn) != CODE_LABEL;
7334 insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7335 {
7336 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) != 'i')
7337 continue;
7338
7339 skipped_writes_memory = init;
7340
7341 if (GET_CODE (insn) == CALL_INSN)
7342 {
7343 invalidate_for_call ();
7344 skipped_writes_memory = everything;
7345 }
7346
7347 note_stores (PATTERN (insn), invalidate_skipped_set);
7348 invalidate_from_clobbers (&skipped_writes_memory, PATTERN (insn));
7349 }
7350 }
7351 \f
7352 /* Used for communication between the following two routines; contains a
7353 value to be checked for modification. */
7354
7355 static rtx cse_check_loop_start_value;
7356
7357 /* If modifying X will modify the value in CSE_CHECK_LOOP_START_VALUE,
7358 indicate that fact by setting CSE_CHECK_LOOP_START_VALUE to 0. */
7359
7360 static void
7361 cse_check_loop_start (x, set)
7362 rtx x;
7363 rtx set;
7364 {
7365 if (cse_check_loop_start_value == 0
7366 || GET_CODE (x) == CC0 || GET_CODE (x) == PC)
7367 return;
7368
7369 if ((GET_CODE (x) == MEM && GET_CODE (cse_check_loop_start_value) == MEM)
7370 || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, cse_check_loop_start_value))
7371 cse_check_loop_start_value = 0;
7372 }
7373
7374 /* X is a SET or CLOBBER contained in INSN that was found near the start of
7375 a loop that starts with the label at LOOP_START.
7376
7377 If X is a SET, we see if its SET_SRC is currently in our hash table.
7378 If so, we see if it has a value equal to some register used only in the
7379 loop exit code (as marked by jump.c).
7380
7381 If those two conditions are true, we search backwards from the start of
7382 the loop to see if that same value was loaded into a register that still
7383 retains its value at the start of the loop.
7384
7385 If so, we insert an insn after the load to copy the destination of that
7386 load into the equivalent register and (try to) replace our SET_SRC with that
7387 register.
7388
7389 In any event, we invalidate whatever this SET or CLOBBER modifies. */
7390
7391 static void
7392 cse_set_around_loop (x, insn, loop_start)
7393 rtx x;
7394 rtx insn;
7395 rtx loop_start;
7396 {
7397 rtx p;
7398 struct table_elt *src_elt;
7399 static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
7400 struct write_data writes_memory;
7401
7402 writes_memory = init;
7403
7404 /* If this is a SET, see if we can replace SET_SRC, but ignore SETs that
7405 are setting PC or CC0 or whose SET_SRC is already a register. */
7406 if (GET_CODE (x) == SET
7407 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != PC && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != CC0
7408 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) != REG)
7409 {
7410 src_elt = lookup (SET_SRC (x),
7411 HASH (SET_SRC (x), GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x))),
7412 GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x)));
7413
7414 if (src_elt)
7415 for (src_elt = src_elt->first_same_value; src_elt;
7416 src_elt = src_elt->next_same_value)
7417 if (GET_CODE (src_elt->exp) == REG && REG_LOOP_TEST_P (src_elt->exp)
7418 && COST (src_elt->exp) < COST (SET_SRC (x)))
7419 {
7420 rtx p, set;
7421
7422 /* Look for an insn in front of LOOP_START that sets
7423 something in the desired mode to SET_SRC (x) before we hit
7424 a label or CALL_INSN. */
7425
7426 for (p = prev_nonnote_insn (loop_start);
7427 p && GET_CODE (p) != CALL_INSN
7428 && GET_CODE (p) != CODE_LABEL;
7429 p = prev_nonnote_insn (p))
7430 if ((set = single_set (p)) != 0
7431 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set)) == REG
7432 && GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set)) == src_elt->mode
7433 && rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (set), SET_SRC (x)))
7434 {
7435 /* We now have to ensure that nothing between P
7436 and LOOP_START modified anything referenced in
7437 SET_SRC (x). We know that nothing within the loop
7438 can modify it, or we would have invalidated it in
7439 the hash table. */
7440 rtx q;
7441
7442 cse_check_loop_start_value = SET_SRC (x);
7443 for (q = p; q != loop_start; q = NEXT_INSN (q))
7444 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (q)) == 'i')
7445 note_stores (PATTERN (q), cse_check_loop_start);
7446
7447 /* If nothing was changed and we can replace our
7448 SET_SRC, add an insn after P to copy its destination
7449 to what we will be replacing SET_SRC with. */
7450 if (cse_check_loop_start_value
7451 && validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (x),
7452 src_elt->exp, 0))
7453 emit_insn_after (gen_move_insn (src_elt->exp,
7454 SET_DEST (set)),
7455 p);
7456 break;
7457 }
7458 }
7459 }
7460
7461 /* Now invalidate anything modified by X. */
7462 note_mem_written (SET_DEST (x), &writes_memory);
7463
7464 if (writes_memory.var)
7465 invalidate_memory (&writes_memory);
7466
7467 /* See comment on similar code in cse_insn for explanation of these tests. */
7468 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == REG || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == SUBREG
7469 || (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == MEM && ! writes_memory.all
7470 && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (SET_DEST (x))))
7471 invalidate (SET_DEST (x));
7472 }
7473 \f
7474 /* Find the end of INSN's basic block and return its range,
7475 the total number of SETs in all the insns of the block, the last insn of the
7476 block, and the branch path.
7477
7478 The branch path indicates which branches should be followed. If a non-zero
7479 path size is specified, the block should be rescanned and a different set
7480 of branches will be taken. The branch path is only used if
7481 FLAG_CSE_FOLLOW_JUMPS or FLAG_CSE_SKIP_BLOCKS is non-zero.
7482
7483 DATA is a pointer to a struct cse_basic_block_data, defined below, that is
7484 used to describe the block. It is filled in with the information about
7485 the current block. The incoming structure's branch path, if any, is used
7486 to construct the output branch path. */
7487
7488 void
7489 cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, data, follow_jumps, after_loop, skip_blocks)
7490 rtx insn;
7491 struct cse_basic_block_data *data;
7492 int follow_jumps;
7493 int after_loop;
7494 int skip_blocks;
7495 {
7496 rtx p = insn, q;
7497 int nsets = 0;
7498 int low_cuid = INSN_CUID (insn), high_cuid = INSN_CUID (insn);
7499 rtx next = GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i' ? insn : next_real_insn (insn);
7500 int path_size = data->path_size;
7501 int path_entry = 0;
7502 int i;
7503
7504 /* Update the previous branch path, if any. If the last branch was
7505 previously TAKEN, mark it NOT_TAKEN. If it was previously NOT_TAKEN,
7506 shorten the path by one and look at the previous branch. We know that
7507 at least one branch must have been taken if PATH_SIZE is non-zero. */
7508 while (path_size > 0)
7509 {
7510 if (data->path[path_size - 1].status != NOT_TAKEN)
7511 {
7512 data->path[path_size - 1].status = NOT_TAKEN;
7513 break;
7514 }
7515 else
7516 path_size--;
7517 }
7518
7519 /* Scan to end of this basic block. */
7520 while (p && GET_CODE (p) != CODE_LABEL)
7521 {
7522 /* Don't cse out the end of a loop. This makes a difference
7523 only for the unusual loops that always execute at least once;
7524 all other loops have labels there so we will stop in any case.
7525 Cse'ing out the end of the loop is dangerous because it
7526 might cause an invariant expression inside the loop
7527 to be reused after the end of the loop. This would make it
7528 hard to move the expression out of the loop in loop.c,
7529 especially if it is one of several equivalent expressions
7530 and loop.c would like to eliminate it.
7531
7532 If we are running after loop.c has finished, we can ignore
7533 the NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END. */
7534
7535 if (! after_loop && GET_CODE (p) == NOTE
7536 && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (p) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END)
7537 break;
7538
7539 /* Don't cse over a call to setjmp; on some machines (eg vax)
7540 the regs restored by the longjmp come from
7541 a later time than the setjmp. */
7542 if (GET_CODE (p) == NOTE
7543 && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (p) == NOTE_INSN_SETJMP)
7544 break;
7545
7546 /* A PARALLEL can have lots of SETs in it,
7547 especially if it is really an ASM_OPERANDS. */
7548 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p)) == 'i'
7549 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (p)) == PARALLEL)
7550 nsets += XVECLEN (PATTERN (p), 0);
7551 else if (GET_CODE (p) != NOTE)
7552 nsets += 1;
7553
7554 /* Ignore insns made by CSE; they cannot affect the boundaries of
7555 the basic block. */
7556
7557 if (INSN_UID (p) <= max_uid && INSN_CUID (p) > high_cuid)
7558 high_cuid = INSN_CUID (p);
7559 if (INSN_UID (p) <= max_uid && INSN_CUID (p) < low_cuid)
7560 low_cuid = INSN_CUID (p);
7561
7562 /* See if this insn is in our branch path. If it is and we are to
7563 take it, do so. */
7564 if (path_entry < path_size && data->path[path_entry].branch == p)
7565 {
7566 if (data->path[path_entry].status != NOT_TAKEN)
7567 p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
7568
7569 /* Point to next entry in path, if any. */
7570 path_entry++;
7571 }
7572
7573 /* If this is a conditional jump, we can follow it if -fcse-follow-jumps
7574 was specified, we haven't reached our maximum path length, there are
7575 insns following the target of the jump, this is the only use of the
7576 jump label, and the target label is preceded by a BARRIER.
7577
7578 Alternatively, we can follow the jump if it branches around a
7579 block of code and there are no other branches into the block.
7580 In this case invalidate_skipped_block will be called to invalidate any
7581 registers set in the block when following the jump. */
7582
7583 else if ((follow_jumps || skip_blocks) && path_size < PATHLENGTH - 1
7584 && GET_CODE (p) == JUMP_INSN
7585 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (p)) == SET
7586 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (p))) == IF_THEN_ELSE
7587 && LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (p)) == 1
7588 && NEXT_INSN (JUMP_LABEL (p)) != 0)
7589 {
7590 for (q = PREV_INSN (JUMP_LABEL (p)); q; q = PREV_INSN (q))
7591 if ((GET_CODE (q) != NOTE
7592 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (q) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END
7593 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (q) == NOTE_INSN_SETJMP)
7594 && (GET_CODE (q) != CODE_LABEL || LABEL_NUSES (q) != 0))
7595 break;
7596
7597 /* If we ran into a BARRIER, this code is an extension of the
7598 basic block when the branch is taken. */
7599 if (follow_jumps && q != 0 && GET_CODE (q) == BARRIER)
7600 {
7601 /* Don't allow ourself to keep walking around an
7602 always-executed loop. */
7603 if (next_real_insn (q) == next)
7604 {
7605 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
7606 continue;
7607 }
7608
7609 /* Similarly, don't put a branch in our path more than once. */
7610 for (i = 0; i < path_entry; i++)
7611 if (data->path[i].branch == p)
7612 break;
7613
7614 if (i != path_entry)
7615 break;
7616
7617 data->path[path_entry].branch = p;
7618 data->path[path_entry++].status = TAKEN;
7619
7620 /* This branch now ends our path. It was possible that we
7621 didn't see this branch the last time around (when the
7622 insn in front of the target was a JUMP_INSN that was
7623 turned into a no-op). */
7624 path_size = path_entry;
7625
7626 p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
7627 /* Mark block so we won't scan it again later. */
7628 PUT_MODE (NEXT_INSN (p), QImode);
7629 }
7630 /* Detect a branch around a block of code. */
7631 else if (skip_blocks && q != 0 && GET_CODE (q) != CODE_LABEL)
7632 {
7633 register rtx tmp;
7634
7635 if (next_real_insn (q) == next)
7636 {
7637 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
7638 continue;
7639 }
7640
7641 for (i = 0; i < path_entry; i++)
7642 if (data->path[i].branch == p)
7643 break;
7644
7645 if (i != path_entry)
7646 break;
7647
7648 /* This is no_labels_between_p (p, q) with an added check for
7649 reaching the end of a function (in case Q precedes P). */
7650 for (tmp = NEXT_INSN (p); tmp && tmp != q; tmp = NEXT_INSN (tmp))
7651 if (GET_CODE (tmp) == CODE_LABEL)
7652 break;
7653
7654 if (tmp == q)
7655 {
7656 data->path[path_entry].branch = p;
7657 data->path[path_entry++].status = AROUND;
7658
7659 path_size = path_entry;
7660
7661 p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
7662 /* Mark block so we won't scan it again later. */
7663 PUT_MODE (NEXT_INSN (p), QImode);
7664 }
7665 }
7666 }
7667 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
7668 }
7669
7670 data->low_cuid = low_cuid;
7671 data->high_cuid = high_cuid;
7672 data->nsets = nsets;
7673 data->last = p;
7674
7675 /* If all jumps in the path are not taken, set our path length to zero
7676 so a rescan won't be done. */
7677 for (i = path_size - 1; i >= 0; i--)
7678 if (data->path[i].status != NOT_TAKEN)
7679 break;
7680
7681 if (i == -1)
7682 data->path_size = 0;
7683 else
7684 data->path_size = path_size;
7685
7686 /* End the current branch path. */
7687 data->path[path_size].branch = 0;
7688 }
7689 \f
7690 /* Perform cse on the instructions of a function.
7691 F is the first instruction.
7692 NREGS is one plus the highest pseudo-reg number used in the instruction.
7693
7694 AFTER_LOOP is 1 if this is the cse call done after loop optimization
7695 (only if -frerun-cse-after-loop).
7696
7697 Returns 1 if jump_optimize should be redone due to simplifications
7698 in conditional jump instructions. */
7699
7700 int
7701 cse_main (f, nregs, after_loop, file)
7702 rtx f;
7703 int nregs;
7704 int after_loop;
7705 FILE *file;
7706 {
7707 struct cse_basic_block_data val;
7708 register rtx insn = f;
7709 register int i;
7710
7711 cse_jumps_altered = 0;
7712 constant_pool_entries_cost = 0;
7713 val.path_size = 0;
7714
7715 init_recog ();
7716
7717 max_reg = nregs;
7718
7719 all_minus_one = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7720 consec_ints = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7721
7722 for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++)
7723 {
7724 all_minus_one[i] = -1;
7725 consec_ints[i] = i;
7726 }
7727
7728 reg_next_eqv = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7729 reg_prev_eqv = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7730 reg_qty = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7731 reg_in_table = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7732 reg_tick = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7733
7734 /* Discard all the free elements of the previous function
7735 since they are allocated in the temporarily obstack. */
7736 bzero (table, sizeof table);
7737 free_element_chain = 0;
7738 n_elements_made = 0;
7739
7740 /* Find the largest uid. */
7741
7742 max_uid = get_max_uid ();
7743 uid_cuid = (int *) alloca ((max_uid + 1) * sizeof (int));
7744 bzero (uid_cuid, (max_uid + 1) * sizeof (int));
7745
7746 /* Compute the mapping from uids to cuids.
7747 CUIDs are numbers assigned to insns, like uids,
7748 except that cuids increase monotonically through the code.
7749 Don't assign cuids to line-number NOTEs, so that the distance in cuids
7750 between two insns is not affected by -g. */
7751
7752 for (insn = f, i = 0; insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7753 {
7754 if (GET_CODE (insn) != NOTE
7755 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) < 0)
7756 INSN_CUID (insn) = ++i;
7757 else
7758 /* Give a line number note the same cuid as preceding insn. */
7759 INSN_CUID (insn) = i;
7760 }
7761
7762 /* Initialize which registers are clobbered by calls. */
7763
7764 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (regs_invalidated_by_call);
7765
7766 for (i = 0; i < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; i++)
7767 if ((call_used_regs[i]
7768 /* Used to check !fixed_regs[i] here, but that isn't safe;
7769 fixed regs are still call-clobbered, and sched can get
7770 confused if they can "live across calls".
7771
7772 The frame pointer is always preserved across calls. The arg
7773 pointer is if it is fixed. The stack pointer usually is, unless
7774 RETURN_POPS_ARGS, in which case an explicit CLOBBER
7775 will be present. If we are generating PIC code, the PIC offset
7776 table register is preserved across calls. */
7777
7778 && i != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
7779 && i != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
7780 #if ARG_POINTER_REGNUM != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
7781 && ! (i == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM && fixed_regs[i])
7782 #endif
7783 #ifdef PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
7784 && ! (i == PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM && flag_pic)
7785 #endif
7786 )
7787 || global_regs[i])
7788 SET_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, i);
7789
7790 /* Loop over basic blocks.
7791 Compute the maximum number of qty's needed for each basic block
7792 (which is 2 for each SET). */
7793 insn = f;
7794 while (insn)
7795 {
7796 cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, &val, flag_cse_follow_jumps, after_loop,
7797 flag_cse_skip_blocks);
7798
7799 /* If this basic block was already processed or has no sets, skip it. */
7800 if (val.nsets == 0 || GET_MODE (insn) == QImode)
7801 {
7802 PUT_MODE (insn, VOIDmode);
7803 insn = (val.last ? NEXT_INSN (val.last) : 0);
7804 val.path_size = 0;
7805 continue;
7806 }
7807
7808 cse_basic_block_start = val.low_cuid;
7809 cse_basic_block_end = val.high_cuid;
7810 max_qty = val.nsets * 2;
7811
7812 if (file)
7813 fprintf (file, ";; Processing block from %d to %d, %d sets.\n",
7814 INSN_UID (insn), val.last ? INSN_UID (val.last) : 0,
7815 val.nsets);
7816
7817 /* Make MAX_QTY bigger to give us room to optimize
7818 past the end of this basic block, if that should prove useful. */
7819 if (max_qty < 500)
7820 max_qty = 500;
7821
7822 max_qty += max_reg;
7823
7824 /* If this basic block is being extended by following certain jumps,
7825 (see `cse_end_of_basic_block'), we reprocess the code from the start.
7826 Otherwise, we start after this basic block. */
7827 if (val.path_size > 0)
7828 cse_basic_block (insn, val.last, val.path, 0);
7829 else
7830 {
7831 int old_cse_jumps_altered = cse_jumps_altered;
7832 rtx temp;
7833
7834 /* When cse changes a conditional jump to an unconditional
7835 jump, we want to reprocess the block, since it will give
7836 us a new branch path to investigate. */
7837 cse_jumps_altered = 0;
7838 temp = cse_basic_block (insn, val.last, val.path, ! after_loop);
7839 if (cse_jumps_altered == 0
7840 || (flag_cse_follow_jumps == 0 && flag_cse_skip_blocks == 0))
7841 insn = temp;
7842
7843 cse_jumps_altered |= old_cse_jumps_altered;
7844 }
7845
7846 #ifdef USE_C_ALLOCA
7847 alloca (0);
7848 #endif
7849 }
7850
7851 /* Tell refers_to_mem_p that qty_const info is not available. */
7852 qty_const = 0;
7853
7854 if (max_elements_made < n_elements_made)
7855 max_elements_made = n_elements_made;
7856
7857 return cse_jumps_altered;
7858 }
7859
7860 /* Process a single basic block. FROM and TO and the limits of the basic
7861 block. NEXT_BRANCH points to the branch path when following jumps or
7862 a null path when not following jumps.
7863
7864 AROUND_LOOP is non-zero if we are to try to cse around to the start of a
7865 loop. This is true when we are being called for the last time on a
7866 block and this CSE pass is before loop.c. */
7867
7868 static rtx
7869 cse_basic_block (from, to, next_branch, around_loop)
7870 register rtx from, to;
7871 struct branch_path *next_branch;
7872 int around_loop;
7873 {
7874 register rtx insn;
7875 int to_usage = 0;
7876 int in_libcall_block = 0;
7877
7878 /* Each of these arrays is undefined before max_reg, so only allocate
7879 the space actually needed and adjust the start below. */
7880
7881 qty_first_reg = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
7882 qty_last_reg = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
7883 qty_mode= (enum machine_mode *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (enum machine_mode));
7884 qty_const = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
7885 qty_const_insn = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
7886 qty_comparison_code
7887 = (enum rtx_code *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (enum rtx_code));
7888 qty_comparison_qty = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
7889 qty_comparison_const = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
7890
7891 qty_first_reg -= max_reg;
7892 qty_last_reg -= max_reg;
7893 qty_mode -= max_reg;
7894 qty_const -= max_reg;
7895 qty_const_insn -= max_reg;
7896 qty_comparison_code -= max_reg;
7897 qty_comparison_qty -= max_reg;
7898 qty_comparison_const -= max_reg;
7899
7900 new_basic_block ();
7901
7902 /* TO might be a label. If so, protect it from being deleted. */
7903 if (to != 0 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL)
7904 ++LABEL_NUSES (to);
7905
7906 for (insn = from; insn != to; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7907 {
7908 register enum rtx_code code;
7909
7910 /* See if this is a branch that is part of the path. If so, and it is
7911 to be taken, do so. */
7912 if (next_branch->branch == insn)
7913 {
7914 enum taken status = next_branch++->status;
7915 if (status != NOT_TAKEN)
7916 {
7917 if (status == TAKEN)
7918 record_jump_equiv (insn, 1);
7919 else
7920 invalidate_skipped_block (NEXT_INSN (insn));
7921
7922 /* Set the last insn as the jump insn; it doesn't affect cc0.
7923 Then follow this branch. */
7924 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
7925 prev_insn_cc0 = 0;
7926 #endif
7927 prev_insn = insn;
7928 insn = JUMP_LABEL (insn);
7929 continue;
7930 }
7931 }
7932
7933 code = GET_CODE (insn);
7934 if (GET_MODE (insn) == QImode)
7935 PUT_MODE (insn, VOIDmode);
7936
7937 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'i')
7938 {
7939 /* Process notes first so we have all notes in canonical forms when
7940 looking for duplicate operations. */
7941
7942 if (REG_NOTES (insn))
7943 REG_NOTES (insn) = cse_process_notes (REG_NOTES (insn), NULL_RTX);
7944
7945 /* Track when we are inside in LIBCALL block. Inside such a block,
7946 we do not want to record destinations. The last insn of a
7947 LIBCALL block is not considered to be part of the block, since
7948 its destination is the result of the block and hence should be
7949 recorded. */
7950
7951 if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_LIBCALL, NULL_RTX))
7952 in_libcall_block = 1;
7953 else if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_RETVAL, NULL_RTX))
7954 in_libcall_block = 0;
7955
7956 cse_insn (insn, in_libcall_block);
7957 }
7958
7959 /* If INSN is now an unconditional jump, skip to the end of our
7960 basic block by pretending that we just did the last insn in the
7961 basic block. If we are jumping to the end of our block, show
7962 that we can have one usage of TO. */
7963
7964 if (simplejump_p (insn))
7965 {
7966 if (to == 0)
7967 return 0;
7968
7969 if (JUMP_LABEL (insn) == to)
7970 to_usage = 1;
7971
7972 /* Maybe TO was deleted because the jump is unconditional.
7973 If so, there is nothing left in this basic block. */
7974 /* ??? Perhaps it would be smarter to set TO
7975 to whatever follows this insn,
7976 and pretend the basic block had always ended here. */
7977 if (INSN_DELETED_P (to))
7978 break;
7979
7980 insn = PREV_INSN (to);
7981 }
7982
7983 /* See if it is ok to keep on going past the label
7984 which used to end our basic block. Remember that we incremented
7985 the count of that label, so we decrement it here. If we made
7986 a jump unconditional, TO_USAGE will be one; in that case, we don't
7987 want to count the use in that jump. */
7988
7989 if (to != 0 && NEXT_INSN (insn) == to
7990 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL && --LABEL_NUSES (to) == to_usage)
7991 {
7992 struct cse_basic_block_data val;
7993
7994 insn = NEXT_INSN (to);
7995
7996 if (LABEL_NUSES (to) == 0)
7997 delete_insn (to);
7998
7999 /* Find the end of the following block. Note that we won't be
8000 following branches in this case. If TO was the last insn
8001 in the function, we are done. Similarly, if we deleted the
8002 insn after TO, it must have been because it was preceded by
8003 a BARRIER. In that case, we are done with this block because it
8004 has no continuation. */
8005
8006 if (insn == 0 || INSN_DELETED_P (insn))
8007 return 0;
8008
8009 to_usage = 0;
8010 val.path_size = 0;
8011 cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, &val, 0, 0, 0);
8012
8013 /* If the tables we allocated have enough space left
8014 to handle all the SETs in the next basic block,
8015 continue through it. Otherwise, return,
8016 and that block will be scanned individually. */
8017 if (val.nsets * 2 + next_qty > max_qty)
8018 break;
8019
8020 cse_basic_block_start = val.low_cuid;
8021 cse_basic_block_end = val.high_cuid;
8022 to = val.last;
8023
8024 /* Prevent TO from being deleted if it is a label. */
8025 if (to != 0 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL)
8026 ++LABEL_NUSES (to);
8027
8028 /* Back up so we process the first insn in the extension. */
8029 insn = PREV_INSN (insn);
8030 }
8031 }
8032
8033 if (next_qty > max_qty)
8034 abort ();
8035
8036 /* If we are running before loop.c, we stopped on a NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END, and
8037 the previous insn is the only insn that branches to the head of a loop,
8038 we can cse into the loop. Don't do this if we changed the jump
8039 structure of a loop unless we aren't going to be following jumps. */
8040
8041 if ((cse_jumps_altered == 0
8042 || (flag_cse_follow_jumps == 0 && flag_cse_skip_blocks == 0))
8043 && around_loop && to != 0
8044 && GET_CODE (to) == NOTE && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (to) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END
8045 && GET_CODE (PREV_INSN (to)) == JUMP_INSN
8046 && JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to)) != 0
8047 && LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to))) == 1)
8048 cse_around_loop (JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to)));
8049
8050 return to ? NEXT_INSN (to) : 0;
8051 }
8052 \f
8053 /* Count the number of times registers are used (not set) in X.
8054 COUNTS is an array in which we accumulate the count, INCR is how much
8055 we count each register usage. */
8056
8057 static void
8058 count_reg_usage (x, counts, incr)
8059 rtx x;
8060 int *counts;
8061 int incr;
8062 {
8063 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
8064 char *fmt;
8065 int i, j;
8066
8067 switch (code)
8068 {
8069 case REG:
8070 counts[REGNO (x)] += incr;
8071 return;
8072
8073 case PC:
8074 case CC0:
8075 case CONST:
8076 case CONST_INT:
8077 case CONST_DOUBLE:
8078 case SYMBOL_REF:
8079 case LABEL_REF:
8080 case CLOBBER:
8081 return;
8082
8083 case SET:
8084 /* Unless we are setting a REG, count everything in SET_DEST. */
8085 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != REG)
8086 count_reg_usage (SET_DEST (x), counts, incr);
8087 count_reg_usage (SET_SRC (x), counts, incr);
8088 return;
8089
8090 case INSN:
8091 case JUMP_INSN:
8092 case CALL_INSN:
8093 count_reg_usage (PATTERN (x), counts, incr);
8094
8095 /* Things used in a REG_EQUAL note aren't dead since loop may try to
8096 use them. */
8097
8098 if (REG_NOTES (x))
8099 count_reg_usage (REG_NOTES (x), counts, incr);
8100 return;
8101
8102 case EXPR_LIST:
8103 case INSN_LIST:
8104 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) == REG_EQUAL)
8105 count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 0), counts, incr);
8106 if (XEXP (x, 1))
8107 count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 1), counts, incr);
8108 return;
8109 }
8110
8111 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
8112 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
8113 {
8114 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
8115 count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, i), counts, incr);
8116 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
8117 for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
8118 count_reg_usage (XVECEXP (x, i, j), counts, incr);
8119 }
8120 }
8121 \f
8122 /* Scan all the insns and delete any that are dead; i.e., they store a register
8123 that is never used or they copy a register to itself.
8124
8125 This is used to remove insns made obviously dead by cse. It improves the
8126 heuristics in loop since it won't try to move dead invariants out of loops
8127 or make givs for dead quantities. The remaining passes of the compilation
8128 are also sped up. */
8129
8130 void
8131 delete_dead_from_cse (insns, nreg)
8132 rtx insns;
8133 int nreg;
8134 {
8135 int *counts = (int *) alloca (nreg * sizeof (int));
8136 rtx insn, prev;
8137 rtx tem;
8138 int i;
8139 int in_libcall = 0;
8140
8141 /* First count the number of times each register is used. */
8142 bzero (counts, sizeof (int) * nreg);
8143 for (insn = next_real_insn (insns); insn; insn = next_real_insn (insn))
8144 count_reg_usage (insn, counts, 1);
8145
8146 /* Go from the last insn to the first and delete insns that only set unused
8147 registers or copy a register to itself. As we delete an insn, remove
8148 usage counts for registers it uses. */
8149 for (insn = prev_real_insn (get_last_insn ()); insn; insn = prev)
8150 {
8151 int live_insn = 0;
8152
8153 prev = prev_real_insn (insn);
8154
8155 /* Don't delete any insns that are part of a libcall block.
8156 Flow or loop might get confused if we did that. Remember
8157 that we are scanning backwards. */
8158 if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_RETVAL, NULL_RTX))
8159 in_libcall = 1;
8160
8161 if (in_libcall)
8162 live_insn = 1;
8163 else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET)
8164 {
8165 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) == REG
8166 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn)) == SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)))
8167 ;
8168
8169 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
8170 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) == CC0
8171 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)))
8172 && ((tem = next_nonnote_insn (insn)) == 0
8173 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (tem)) != 'i'
8174 || ! reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, PATTERN (tem))))
8175 ;
8176 #endif
8177 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) != REG
8178 || REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
8179 || counts[REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn)))] != 0
8180 || side_effects_p (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn))))
8181 live_insn = 1;
8182 }
8183 else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
8184 for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
8185 {
8186 rtx elt = XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i);
8187
8188 if (GET_CODE (elt) == SET)
8189 {
8190 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) == REG
8191 && SET_DEST (elt) == SET_SRC (elt))
8192 ;
8193
8194 #ifdef HAVE_cc0
8195 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) == CC0
8196 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (elt))
8197 && ((tem = next_nonnote_insn (insn)) == 0
8198 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (tem)) != 'i'
8199 || ! reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, PATTERN (tem))))
8200 ;
8201 #endif
8202 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) != REG
8203 || REGNO (SET_DEST (elt)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
8204 || counts[REGNO (SET_DEST (elt))] != 0
8205 || side_effects_p (SET_SRC (elt)))
8206 live_insn = 1;
8207 }
8208 else if (GET_CODE (elt) != CLOBBER && GET_CODE (elt) != USE)
8209 live_insn = 1;
8210 }
8211 else
8212 live_insn = 1;
8213
8214 /* If this is a dead insn, delete it and show registers in it aren't
8215 being used. */
8216
8217 if (! live_insn)
8218 {
8219 count_reg_usage (insn, counts, -1);
8220 delete_insn (insn);
8221 }
8222
8223 if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_LIBCALL, NULL_RTX))
8224 in_libcall = 0;
8225 }
8226 }
This page took 0.425449 seconds and 6 git commands to generate.